JP6980276B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball winning a prize in a starting opening is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to enter a gaming state advantageous to the player. In this determination, the probability that the gaming state is determined to be advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-473333

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the gaming machine, in which it is determined whether or not the gaming state is favorable to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the subject is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A determination means for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined setting values, and a setting means for setting the setting value.
Equipped with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The set value includes a first set value and a second set value having a higher probability than the first set value.
There are a first effect content and a second effect content as the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be executed by the effect control means.
When the first set value is set, a specific event that is more advantageous to the player may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means. On the other hand, the specific event does not occur after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means.
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, and the effect control means may cause the effect. It is characterized in that the specific event may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of the display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the effect control board side. (A) is a table showing the general map-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing the special map-related determination information. (A) is a hit determination table, (B) is a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an auxiliary game control table. (A) is a jackpot judgment table when the set value is "1", (B) is a jackpot judgment table when the set value is "2", and (C) is a jackpot judgment table when the set value is "3". (D) is a jackpot judgment table when the set value is "4", (E) is a jackpot judgment table when the set value is "5", and (F) is a setting. It is a jackpot determination table when the value is "6". (A) is a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (B) is a reach determination table. Special figure 1 It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. Special figure 2 It is a fluctuation pattern determination table. This is the first look-ahead determination table. This is the second look-ahead determination table. (A) is a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probabilistic variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation effect of the loss without reach. It is a figure which shows an example from the start of a special figure variation effect to the reach. It is a figure which shows an example of N reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 24. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 25. It is a figure which shows an example of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold production. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of a setting value setting process. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 35. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of the effect control main process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 46. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a part of the flowchart of the sensor detection process by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the relationship between the set value and the out-ball determination value which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the relationship between the setting value which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention, and the difference number determination value. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the first composite symbol, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the second composite symbol, (C) is a diagram showing an example of the third composite symbol, and (D) is a first set value. A diagram showing an example of a symbol, (E) is a diagram showing an example of a second set value symbol, and (F) is a diagram showing an example of a third set value symbol. It is a set value symbol pattern judgment table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the stop symbol pattern determination process which concerns on 3rd Embodiment of this invention. It is a lottery result information determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of a set value effect determination process. It is a flowchart of the stop symbol pattern determination process which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. It is a set value production execution judgment table. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for setting value production. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for normal use. It is a stop symbol pattern determination table for normal use. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a special figure variation effect pattern determination table which concerns on 6th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of success / failure reversal effect determination processing. It is a success / failure reversal effect execution determination table. It is a continuation count determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 7th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of a set value effect processing. It is a flowchart of the set value effect processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 76. It is a jackpot symbol type determination table which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a jackpot game control table which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a game state setting table which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the jackpot game production by the pachinko game machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the set value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 8th Embodiment of this invention. It is a blessing production judgment table. It is a blessing production judgment table. It is a flowchart of a blessing production process. In the ninth embodiment of the present invention, it is a figure which shows the mode that the variable display of an effect symbol starts in a normal start mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the set value effect determination process which concerns on 9th Embodiment of this invention. The second set value production determination table. It is a jackpot determination table which concerns on the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a jackpot determination table which concerns on the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a game state setting table which concerns on the tenth embodiment of this invention. FIG. 1 is a variation pattern determination table according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table according to the tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a small hit game control table which concerns on the tenth embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the special operation process which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process according to a tenth embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a table which shows the selectivity of big hit, small hit, and loss which concerns on 10th Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart of the setting value setting process which concerns on 11th Embodiment of this invention. It is a setting value judgment table.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, by describing a symbol or a code that refers to an information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc. for the symbol or the code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. 1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY1 which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the left-right and up-down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 are the left-right and up-down directions (front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Further, "front" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "rear" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 toward the pachinko gaming machine PY1. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a gaming board unit YU including the gaming board 1 and a gaming machine frame 2 in which the gaming board unit YU is housed. The gaming machine frame 2 has a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 to which the gaming board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. It is provided with a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer shape in front view. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23 m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It suffices if the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 through the transparent plate 23t.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, a handle 72k that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (launch intensity) applied to the game ball to launch the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, an upper plate 34 that protrudes greatly forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly under the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game ball supplied to the handle 72k is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the lower plate 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing a surplus game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A is provided.

Further, on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23 m, the upper side decorative body 31, the right side decorative body 32, and the left side decorative body 33 are provided. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side are predetermined in the left-right direction facing downward. They are arranged side by side at a distance. Further, at the lower part of the right decorative body 32, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed into a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the gaming.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A substantially circular opening 1A is formed in the substantially center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61. A curved inner rail 63, which is substantially parallel to the center decoration 61, is formed.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, the area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the game area 6.

The gaming area 6 is an area in which a gaming ball launched by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine PY1. A large number of gaming nails (not shown) are projected in the gaming area 6. The game nail appropriately connects the game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, the general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that a game ball can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

From the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side portion of the center decoration body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which the game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guide portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided immediately below the first start opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric chew opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is composed of a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can project forward from the retracted state where the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, a vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big winning opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the big winning device 14D. That is, the large winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and normally closes the large winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation axis is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees around its rotation axis so that the upper end thereof tilts forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 6, and the large winning opening 14 is opened so that the ball can be entered.

In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the large winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the large winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and the guidance path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is the game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

It should be noted that the first starting port 11, the second starting port 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10 collectively enter the game ball and pass through the gate 13 of the game ball. Collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 on which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting port 12, or the large winning opening 14 by launching the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

It should be noted that, at the substantially lowermost portion of the game area 6, two out ports 19 are provided to discharge the game ball that has been driven into the game area 6 but has not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board production unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes a movable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state of the board movable body 55k, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be seen by the player and most of it cannot be seen in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position as a whole, rise from the operating position, and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the movable board 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, a predetermined work position can be appropriately set, regardless of whether the board movable body 55k is placed above or below the substantially center of the opening 1A in front view. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the board movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held at the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the indicators 8 arranged on the right side (the portion other than the game area 6) substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 display 81a for variably displaying the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1”) and a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2”). A special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying) and a normal figure display 82 for variably displaying a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure”) are included. Further, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying the special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying the special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are collectively referred to as a "special figure", and the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as a "special figure lottery". Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure informs the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game is performed with the opening of the big winning opening 14.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final result is "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■: off), which is the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left. A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. If the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the far right, such as "■■■■■■■ □", will finally light up. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

Further, in the variable display of the special map, the variable display of the special map is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special map is stopped and displayed. The mode of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, even if the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately. Specifically, it is a case where a prize is given to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special drawing lottery and variable display of special drawings are called "special drawing reservations".

The special drawing hold includes the special drawing 1 lottery held based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the "special drawing 1 holding" representing the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning of the second starting opening 12. There are a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above, and a "special figure 2 hold" representing the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 83a displays the number of the special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of the special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display of the special figure 2.

It is possible to set or not set the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by turning on the LEDs for the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Figure 1 Displays the number of holds and Special Figure 2 Holds. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as "special figure 1 hold number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 hold is referred to as "special figure 2 hold number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 hold number" and "special figure 2 hold number" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold number". Further, the "special figure 1 hold indicator 83a" and the "special figure 2 hold indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

Further, the variable display of the fuzu is executed when the fuzu lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the normal map informs the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal map is a predetermined specific normal map, an auxiliary game is performed with the opening of the second starting port 12.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the normal figure display 82 represents a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery, that is, the result of the normal figure lottery. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs will eventually turn on, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). This lighting mode is a hit symbol and represents a hit. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the right will light up, such as "■ □". This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol.

Further, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variation display of the normal diagram is an embodiment in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the mode of variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), all LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 that controls the game (progress of the game) capable of obtaining the game profit, and the game control board 100 responds to the progress of the game. Power is supplied to the effect control board 120 that controls the effect, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game ball, and the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. The power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power is turned on / off by turning the power switch 191 on and off.

A set value cylinder 70 for changing a set value, which will be described later, and a set value switch 71 are provided in the vicinity of the game control board 100. The set value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A into which a dedicated setting key is inserted. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the insertion hole 70A, the set value cylinder 70 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the reference standby state. Then, as will be described later, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective by rotating the set value cylinder 70 90 degrees clockwise from the standby state. The set value switch 71 is configured to be pressable. Further, a set value display 87 for displaying the current set value is mounted on the surface of the game control board 100. Further, the set value display 87 is composed of a red 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, the game that can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of the special figure, a big hit game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, and a variable display of the normal figure. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process, a game control side timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary. A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure holding storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball, the special figure hold can occur, but if the special figure hold is possible, that is, the number of special figure hold is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure hold. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball. Judgment information is referred to as "special figure 2 related judgment information". Further, the special figure 1 related judgment information and the special figure 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special figure related judgment information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a set value storage unit 107 for storing set value data indicating a set value described later.

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14.

Further, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

Further, the set value cylinder sensor 70a can detect the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70. When there is a rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, and a detection signal indicating that the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated is sent to the game control board. Output to 100.

On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect the pressing operation of the set value switch 71. When the set value switch 71 is pressed, the set value switch sensor 71a detects the pressed operation of the set value switch 71, and a detection signal indicating that the set value switch 71 is pressed is transmitted to the game control board. Output to 100.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the prize-winning device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to the display 8 (special figure display 81, normal figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83) and the set value display 87. The display control of these indicators 8 and the set value indicator 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a launcher 72 is also connected to the payout control board 170. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensor 73a for counting.

Further, the launching device 72 is a device for launching a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for launching the game ball to the launching device 72, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the knob 72b of the firing volume. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress status (game control content) of the game by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect control board 120 is mounted with an effect control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “effect control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The effect control board 120 can be positioned as an effect control unit that controls the effect together with the image control board 140, the voice control circuit 161 and the sub drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the effect control unit includes at least the effect control board 120, and uses the effect device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.) for game effect, customer waiting effect, and operation promotion. It suffices if the production can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, etc.), customer waiting effect, and operation of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes operation promotion effects that encourage operations during the valid period (operation valid period).

The effect control microcomputer 121 is stored in an effect ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the effect as the game progresses by the game control board 100, an effect RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and an effect ROM 123. The effect CPU 122 for executing the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing an effect control main process, a receive interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. The effect ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 has a start winning command holding storage unit 125 that stores a start winning command described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 that stores a symbol designation command described later, and a special figure variation that stores a special figure fluctuation start command described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a setting value flag storage unit 128 for storing a setting value flag described later are provided.

Further, the image control board 140 is connected to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes a program stored in the image ROM 142. .. Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. It is equipped with Random Access Memory) 146 and VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data, moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a pattern, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc.) (effect). Image data such as (including patterns) and background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and expands it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various effect images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the voice, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured on a board to mount a CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a drive source are connected to the effect control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the effect control board 120. Further, the effect control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

The various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal corresponding to the detected content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the effect control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the effect control board 120 include a motor for rotating members 55m1 and a motor for elevating members 55m2. The rotary member motor 55m1 can drive the rotary member 55k1 to rotate the rotary member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub drive board 162. ..

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100 and the like. In detail, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is in accordance with the light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The sub drive board 162 may be configured by the board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the board movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Main games by the gaming machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16.

3-1. Games related to Fuzu First, we will explain the games related to Fuzu. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute a general drawing lottery when the launched gaming ball passes through the gate 13. When the normal map lottery is performed, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map (stop display after performing variable display). Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal figure that is stopped and displayed. It should be noted that the lost pattern of the normal figure is also referred to as "missing normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost pattern of the special figure described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost general map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a series of games such as a normal map lottery, a variable display of the normal map, and an auxiliary game by satisfying the normal map variation start condition and acquiring the normal map related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired general map-related determination information includes a normal symbol random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. A range is appropriately provided for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit determination The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to hit (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with the gaming state described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time reduction hit determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a hit determination table (time reduction hit determination table) used in the time reduction state.

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and determines whether the hit or miss is a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal map. The winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination / normal map variable display The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a judgment for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern using, for example, a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and the time saving used in the non-time saving state. There is a normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the state.

In each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make the fluctuation time of the normal map different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map (lost normal map) is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is set. The variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed is determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined so that the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these fluctuation times of the normal map can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the variable display of the normal map variation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal map display 82. By performing the hit determination and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination in this way, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal map, and is executed when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of the general map lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table. The auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time in which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time-saving state, the game ball is won a prize in the electric chew 12D, for example, longer than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time, which is easy to make.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the short time state is also called "long open auxiliary game". Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, for example, opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. When the launched game ball wins the first starting port 11, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special drawing 1 lottery. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery has a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed and the game based on the winning is completed.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the winning is completed.

Further, in the following, the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and the winning of the game ball in the second starting opening 12 is "establishment of the second starting condition". That is. Further, "establishment of the first starting condition" and "establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "missing special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned lost symbol of the normal drawing.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a series of games such as a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, and a big hit game by satisfying the starting condition and acquiring the special figure-related determination information. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a jackpot judgment. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Next, each determination made using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, either a jackpot or a loss, using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F, for example, the jackpot determination table can be provided for each set value. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot determination table with the set value.

The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination (hereinafter, also referred to as "big hit probability"). As will be described later, the set value can be set when the power of the game control board 100 is turned on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, the set value can be set for each pachinko gaming machine PY1.

In the basic embodiment, six types of set values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and a set value of "3". The jackpot judgment table used at the time, the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "4", the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "5", and the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "6". There is a jackpot determination table used.

Further, each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set value includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. (Hereinafter, it is referred to as "high probability jackpot judgment table"). The type of set value is not limited to the basic embodiment and can be set as appropriate.

In each jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the game state, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed to the jackpot and the loss which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F), for each set value, the special symbol random number judgment value in which the high-probability jackpot determination table is determined to be a jackpot is higher than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Is set a lot. Further, for the same game state, as the set value becomes higher, more special symbol random number determination values determined to be big hits are set. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine that it is a big hit.

It is possible to appropriately change the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) is determined using the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 11 (A). It is to be. It is possible to associate the jackpot symbol type with the jackpot content, in other words, the jackpot component (content advantageous to the player) composed of the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the prize is awarded due to the jackpot symbol type determination (causing the jackpot symbol type determination). It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second big hit symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol random number (big hit symbol random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired jackpot symbol random numbers with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be appropriately set. For example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 is used. As a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, three types of jackpot symbols are provided, and as a jackpot symbol of special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F are used. Can be provided. Then, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. There is. The distribution rate for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination In the reach determination, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, whether or not to generate reach in the special figure variation effect described later is determined by using the reach determination table as shown in FIG. 11 (B). It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach) used in the non-time reduction state. Judgment table).

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 11B, it is possible to make the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "reachable (generate reach)" different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "miss" is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (without reach). "Does not generate reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach".

3-2-4. Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a fluctuation pattern judgment table of a special symbol as shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 (special figure fluctuation pattern). The determination table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special map variation pattern) of the variable display of the special map.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to a special figure fluctuation time, a so-called “shaku”, an effect flow (effect content) of a special figure variation effect described later, and the like. In addition, the special figure fluctuation pattern includes identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination, the result of the jackpot symbol type determination, and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the effect flow (effect content) of the special figure variation time and the special figure variation effect. It is also possible to make it. The type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display to be judged, in other words, the starting port where a prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It can be associated with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used at the time of the operation.

Then, each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). That is, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table includes the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time reduction special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and the special figure 1 used in the non-time reduction state. There is a variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is also used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving).

Further, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table have a jackpot symbol, a reach loss, and a reachless loss, respectively. Similarly, the non-time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table also have a jackpot symbol, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2 and the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is used, and when the special drawing 1 holding number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 hold number. Specifically, when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, and when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

Then, the special map display 81 performs the variation display of the special map variation time according to the special map variation pattern determined by each special map variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special symbol variable display (result of the special symbol lottery) after the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and subsequently. , The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with an effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 12 to 13. Here, a typical effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as the effects that make up the effect flow of the special figure variation effect.

The normal fluctuation suggests that the effect symbols that had been stopped and displayed started to change, and each of the effect symbols constituting each effect display changed at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special figure was started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) related to the loss change without reach, and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure change effect where the reach occurs are normal fluctuations. May consist of.

Immediately after the reach is established (determined) through normal fluctuation, the N reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where, for example, the effect symbols constituting the reach are temporarily stopped, and the remaining one. It is a production in which the production symbol slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than the normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than the L reach and SP reach described below. When the special symbol variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of loss, the remaining one effect symbol stops at an effect symbol different from the effect symbols constituting the reach. If the special symbol variation effect is not completed in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach or SP reach while the reach is maintained.

The L reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the L reach (the image dedicated to the L reach is played). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the production content of L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character performing special training to learn a special move.

The SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to SP reach (the image dedicated to SP reach is played). In the SP reach, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rivals of the hero character belong play a match is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 50a). In the state of moving to the upper right of), it switches to the background image dedicated to the battle production (the video dedicated to the battle production is played). Further, in the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production are displayed in the display unit 50a. Not only the state in which the image is visible in the display unit 50a, but also the state in which the effect symbol constituting the reach is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period, for example, in relation to the dedicated background image. In addition, the production contents of normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 12 to 13, it is possible to give a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern in association with the jackpot determination result and the effect content of the special figure fluctuation effect. .. The special map fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special map fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special map fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special map fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special map variation in N reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern at which the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach fluctuation". In addition, the loss fluctuation with reach is referred to as "loss fluctuation with reach", and the loss fluctuation without reach may be collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

3-2-5. Pre-reading determination The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform pre-reading determination using, for example, a pre-reading determination table as shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 based on the acquired special figure-related determination information before performing jackpot determination. be. The look-ahead determination table is the type of start port (first start port 11 / second start port 12) related to the start prize, in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed by the start prize (special figure 1 / special figure). It is possible to relate to 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in the case where the first start opening 11 is won and the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the second start opening 12 is won, and the special figure is shown. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 15) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The look-ahead determination performed based on the first look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "first look-ahead determination", and the look-ahead determination performed based on the second look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "second look-ahead determination".

Further, the look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state) described later. That is, the look-ahead judgment table includes a look-ahead judgment table (a look-ahead judgment table for a normal game state) used in a normal gaming state and a look-ahead judgment table (a high-probability high-base game) used in a high-probability high-base game state. There is a pre-reading determination table for a state) and a pre-reading determination table (a pre-reading determination table for a low-probability high-base gaming state) used in a low-probability high-based gaming state.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in a normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a low-probability high-base gaming state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base gaming state, and the low-probability high-base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used in.

By the look-ahead determination using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 15, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the look-ahead determination result. If "big hit" is specified in the look-ahead determination, the jackpot symbol type is also specified as the look-ahead determination result. When the pre-reading determination table is used to specify the success or failure of the jackpot, the special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set set value is used.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 as a look-ahead determination result along with the generation thereof. It should be noted that what kind of information is specified as the look-ahead determination result can be appropriately changed.

As described above, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Jackpot game

The jackpot game consists of multiple round games involving the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game to the start of the first round game, and the final round game. Includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, in the following, the round game of a predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first (first) round game is also referred to as "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also referred to as "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the jackpot game by using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the type of jackpot symbol. And one kind or a plurality of kinds of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (big hit game components). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the big winning opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening where each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closed time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can control the jackpot game by using, for example, the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16 (A). That is, it is possible to set the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 16A. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16A will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as “second jackpot game”), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as “fourth jackpot game”), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth big hit game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 14 has elapsed, it is large. The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. May be. For example, a device capable of distributing to two winning openings is provided in the game area 6, and if one winning opening is awarded, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while if the other winning opening is won, a predetermined number is specified. Either a jackpot game consisting of more than a number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by a lottery or the like.

3-4. Game state Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed and a non-big hit game state in which the jackpot game is not executed. The non-big hit game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the advantage to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12, the advantage to the player is that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is higher. It means that the time will be longer.

As the specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific gaming states without mounting all of these three types of specific gaming states on the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called the "normal probability state".

Further, as a partial gaming state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 A state in which the ease of opening is advantageous to the player is called a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". It is called "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 is more likely to win a prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be shorter than that of the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the normal map fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is set in the time-shortened state. Let it be decided. As a result, the number of times the general drawing lottery is executed per unit time is larger in the time-saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the collision detection and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

Further, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is released for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the collision detection and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time becomes the same, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is long, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

Further, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which it is easier to determine that the hit is a hit than in the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the fluctuation time of the normal figure in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the collision will be determined as a hit. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

In this way, it is easier to win in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the three conditions are satisfied, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In the time saving state, not all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may be satisfied, but only a part of the conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the time-reduced state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-reduced state, and it is sufficient that the second starting port 12 can be easily won.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special figure variable display per unit time is small or special by making it easier to select the special figure fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the fluctuation times may be set to be low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as "high probability high base game state" and the second specific game state is referred to as "high probability low" in relation to the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the normal probability state and time-saving state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled by the high-probability state and time-saving state. It can be said that the game is in a state of being.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can be controlled in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a low-probability high-base gaming state, a high-probability low-base gaming state, a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the big hit game state can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can be said to be "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. Further, the high-probability high-base gaming state and the low-probability high-base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting port 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the first start opening 11 and the big prize opening 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the second start opening 12 are opened, so that the jackpot game state is a low probability low base game. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the normal gaming state is first set. In addition, the jackpot game state is set by displaying the stop of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be described.

3-5. Setting of specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can newly set a specific gaming state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. It is also possible to limit the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued.

When limiting the duration of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the termination condition for the continuation period is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high-probability high-base gaming state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low-probability high-base gaming state or the high-probability low-base gaming state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, the same or different end conditions may be set for the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state, and when the end condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state may be set.

In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure can be set. In addition, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed is not limited to the elapsed time after the big hit game, the number of balls launched after the big hit game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the big hit game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the end condition to derive the result of ending in the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Further, these elements may be set individually as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

In addition, these end conditions may be set to be the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the big hit game, and may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the end condition may be different for each specific game state.

Further, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 16B, the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol D, or the jackpot symbol E is high after the jackpot game is completed. The game may be controlled in a high probability base game state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until a big hit is won without setting an end condition. Further, the game may be controlled in a low probability and high base game state after the end of the big hit game related to the big hit symbol C and the big hit symbol F. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability high-base game state, and the special figure variable display can be set to 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence or absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the big hit, the big hit in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the big hit game is also called "high probability big hit". Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "probability change jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot".

4. Main effects by the gaming machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 31.

4-1. Production mode First, the production mode will be described. The effect mode is a division (or a higher-level conceptual attribute) of the effect. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as the effect modes.

In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no special figure and indicates that the standby state is in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, the setting screen G101 for making settings related to the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 as shown in FIG. 17B. Is displayed. The settings related to the effect include a volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, a brightness setting of the display unit 50a, a frequency setting of the effect to be executed, and the like. It should be noted that the setting items related to the effect can be appropriately set. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal effect mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower production modes belonging to the normal production mode can be provided. For example, as the lower-level effect mode belonging to the normal effect mode, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided.

In the following, the production mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the production mode is also referred to as a “production stage”. Along with this, the first normal production mode is also referred to as the "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also referred to as the "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also referred to as the "third normal production stage". Say.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this way, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on the SP reach variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure variation effect, but the special figure variation effect is established for the entire section of the special figure variation effect when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before reaching and a rear part after reaching when reach occurs. The front part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

Then, in the front stage portion of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (A): first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (B): second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the third normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (C): third normal background image G113) mainly representing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and the normal effect mode is used. A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the type of the effect stage, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

Further, the normal effect mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be set to the effect mode indicating that the non-time saving state is set. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base gaming state and the high-probability low-base gaming state generated under certain conditions, a predetermined effect mode different from the normal effect mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the state is a high probability high base game state. In the pre-stage portion of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, a background image (probability variation background image G120) representing the universe is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the probabilistic effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probabilistic effect mode is displayed.

The time saving effect mode can be set in the "low probability high base game state" or the "high probability high base game state", and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and at least the time reduction. This is an effect mode indicating that the state is in a state. In the front part of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18E, a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the time saving effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving effect mode is displayed.

The time-saving effect mode is set only in the low-probability high-base game state, and can be set to the effect mode indicating that the time-saving effect mode is the low-probability high-base game state.

Further, for either or either of the probabilistic effect mode and the time-saving effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are further provided as in the normal effect mode, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can do it.

The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when the jackpot game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19A, the opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and the right-handed image G2 prompting "right-handed" are displayed on the display unit 50a. Is displayed. The jackpot opening effect is performed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 on the display unit 50a. ..

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and the round image showing the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which the prize ball number image G4 suggesting the G3 and the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 on the display unit 50a, and the background image according to the type of the jackpot game (background for the round). The image G201) is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls paid out. The jackpot ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed is performed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Will be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a "big hit game effect" as an effect performed in the jackpot game. That is, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a special figure fluctuation pattern and a special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result, reach judgment result, and The special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) and the like.

In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a superimposes the variation display of the effect symbol on the predetermined background image. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect is stopped after the effect symbol is changed. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the effect symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the effect symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

In the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in response to the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The effect symbol is also identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the effect symbol constitutes identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of effect symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, the effect symbols may be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect symbols may be provided. Here, the numbers themselves constitute identification information for indicating the special figure lottery result. It should be noted that the effect symbols composed of the numbers 1 to 9 are strictly different images because the numbers are different from each other. Then, the effect symbol of the number "1" is referred to as an effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the effect symbols of the numbers "2" to the numbers "9" are referred to as the effect symbols G10b to the effect symbols G10i. For convenience, when the individual production symbols 1 to 9 are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "effect symbol G10".

Further, the effect symbols G10 of "3" and "7" are red, and the effect symbols of "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and "9" are used. G10 is blue. That is, a color is also set as a component of the effect symbol G10. The configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be appropriately changed. For example, other components such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect symbol G10.

Subsequently, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (B), the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction are the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. The region can be 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

In particular, in the front part of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is "middle". The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of the numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbols are displayed at relative display positions. When distinguishing G10, it is described as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, it is possible to provide a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, but for example, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers, the small symbol can be configured by reducing the effect symbol as it is. Further, when the effect symbol is composed of numbers and characters, it is also possible to extract only the number portion to form a small symbol.

In FIG. 20B, the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a alternate long and short dash line. It is described to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, as the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal variation The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform normal variation in the special figure variation effect. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As the small symbols, the small symbol KZ1, the small symbol KZ2, and the small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is waiting, FIG. 21 (B). As shown in, the special figure fluctuation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

Then, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically the background side of the background images G111 to G115 and the like. The image of is displayed with transparency that is easy to see.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss fluctuation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the reach occurring (special figure). Along with the stop display), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed with the loss stitches (so-called “separate stitches”) peculiar to the loss without reach.

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then is shown in FIG. 21 (D). As shown in FIG. 21 (E), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 21 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 21 (F), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being lined up horizontally at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once as they are, and the stop is stopped. Confirm (stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped at the random stitches, that is, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 become the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It stops all at once with the same disparity, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

In the example of FIG. 21, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3 → the middle effect symbol EZ2, but the effect temporarily stops. The embodiment is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the special map fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the N loss variation), FIG. 22 ( As shown in A), from the state where the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed, and the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium size symbol KZ2 and the right small symbol KZ3 are stopped and displayed. , The variable display of the special symbol is started, and as shown in FIG. 22B, the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started. Suppose that starts.

Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 according to the number "5" temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then, as shown in FIG. 22 (D), the same number. The right effect symbols EZ3 according to "5" are temporarily stopped side by side in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction to reach (reach is generated or established). Even if the reach is established in the effect symbol, the variable display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is continuously performed.

In the example of FIG. 22, when the reach is established, the effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3, but the mode of the temporary stop is not limited to this, and may be set appropriately. Can be done. Further, the number of the effect symbol constituting the reach is not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special map fluctuation effect when there is no reach loss and the section from the start of the special map variation effect when reach occurs to the time when the reach is established are usually fluctuations.

4-2-2. The N-reach pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N reach is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a production for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 22D, N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the state in which reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at the substantially center position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 23 (C), the middle effect symbol EZ2 composed of numbers different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 23 (C)) is temporarily stopped. do. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 23 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss is peculiar to the loss with reach. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Further, when the temporarily stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are completely stopped at the loss peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 However, they are stopped all at once with the same loss eyes peculiar to the loss with reach as the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

If the special symbol variation effect is not completed in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach or SP reach while the reach is maintained.

4-2-3. SP reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform SP reach after N reach. SP reach is a production that suggests that the possibility that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery was "big hit" is higher than N reach and L reach, and functions as a production to make the player expect a big hit. .. Although the established reach is maintained even in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), at the start of the SP reach, the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the display unit 50a is small. It moves to a predetermined position that does not overlap with the symbol area 50c (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a).

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a, an enemy character appears, and then, As shown in FIG. 24B, an image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that SP reach has been started is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach "" Beat the enemy batter XX !! "in FIG. 24 (B)" and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 24C, a scene in which the main character and the enemy character, which is a rival of the main character, are facing each other is displayed. The content of SP reach consists of a confrontation scene between a baseball pitcher and a batter. Here, the main character is the pitcher and the enemy character is the batter.

After that, in the background image G115 for SP reach, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 25 (A), and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. 25 (B). As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning or losing turning point) of whether the main character wins or loses in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter.

After this victory / defeat branch point, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the special map fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (for example, the SP jackpot fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 26 (A-1), the display unit 50a shows. , After the enemy character strikes out and wins the confrontation, as shown in FIG. 26 (B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed, and from the speaker 52. A predetermined sound effect is output. At this time, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in an manner indicating a big hit.

In this way, the display of the main character who wins the confrontation and raises a scream and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute an effect of notifying the jackpot (big hit notification effect). After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-1), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed in an manner indicating a big hit.

On the other hand, after the winning / losing branch point, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the special map fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the SP loss fluctuation), the background for SP reach is not performed without the jackpot notification effect. In image G115, as shown in FIG. 26 (A-2), an enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 26 (B-2), the main character is discouraged on the mound. A loss notification effect is performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (C-2), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the missed stitches for reach. The content of the SP reach is not limited to the content in which the characters confront each other in baseball, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. Movable body effects and operation effects are performed as part of these effects in the form of being incorporated into the above-mentioned SP reach, N reach, and even jackpot game effects, and when they are performed independently of these effects. There is. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect accompanied by an operation of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as a board movable device 55, and functions as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit and the development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 27 (A), when the special figure variation effect develops from N reach to SP reach, first of all, FIG. 27. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 operates, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (C), the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, a scene in which the main character is displayed in a large size on the display unit 50a is displayed, and the SP reach is developed. It should be noted that the operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform operation effects including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed according to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the winning / losing branch point is reached in the SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (the first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button operation valid period As shown in FIG. 28 (A), an effect of urging the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation promotion effect) is performed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion image G12 is an image (first effect button image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k and an image (pressing operation image) representing an operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. It includes G12b and an image (image of the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period) G12c showing the remaining time of the operation valid period (first effect button operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k.

The first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period with the passage of time. Changes to. Note that FIG. 28B shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and one-third of the first effect button operation valid time has elapsed.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the jackpot (for example, the SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period, Alternatively, the operation result effect is performed after the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the first effect button 40k being operated during the first effect button operation valid period.

As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 28C, the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is produced. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, as an operation result effect, the normal effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 28 (D), the normal effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k is raised, so that the operation result production is completed. When the operation result effect is completed, the jackpot notification effect is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of reach loss (for example, SP loss fluctuation), the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period. Alternatively, even if the remaining time of the effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the first effect button 40k being pressed, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss notification effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 and the display of the normal effect image G13, and can be appropriately changed or added. In addition, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, but can also be executed in the big hit effect.

4-5. Look-ahead effect Next, a look-ahead effect that can be executed before the variable display of the special figure, which is the target of the special figure hold, is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the special figure lottery has not been performed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation effect. be. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that makes the big hit expected even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a hold icon notice using a hold effect indicating a special figure hold. Here, the hold effect and the hold icon notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 29 (A), the hold effect is performed in the hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first region 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur in the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 50d2 to the fourth region 50d4, it occurs in the 2nd to 4th positions in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and is based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon representing the special figure 1 hold on which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions.

In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "special figure 1 hold" and "special figure 1 hold in hold order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the variation display area 50e, a variation icon representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the variable icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d, and strictly speaking, it is a “hold effect” corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. However, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the variable icon are collectively referred to as "hold effect". .. In addition, the hold icon and the variable icon are collectively referred to as an "icon".

In FIG. 29A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are indicated by a one-dot chain line, and the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are indicated by a broken line, which are indicated by the reserved display area 50d. It is described to represent the range of the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 and the variable display region 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 change is being displayed (the special figure change is being produced), and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 29 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned variation display area 50e (not shown), the variation icon HA1 representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 29B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display area 50d is displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed by the hold icon. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the variation icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not shown. Move to the first region 50d1 in the figure. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest occurrence of the special figure 1 hold currently held. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation according to the change of the special figure variable display to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the variable display area 50e represents the execution of the special figure 1 variable display, it becomes the variable icon HA2 when displayed in the variable display area 50e. That is, as a word attached before the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is referred to as "variation". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as a variable icon. Further, when the hold icon is changed to the variable icon, in other words, the icon is enlarged about twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 29 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown).

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the pass / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called "hold icon notice".

When the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold icon notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. .. Next, a specific example of the hold icon notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold icon notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 29 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold icon notice, a special mode is set immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold icon notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first start port 11 is won). There is a hold icon notice type. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 29 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned event occurs, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 29 (E).

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 30 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 30 (B)) (the hold icon notice is performed). In the example of FIG. 30, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of hold icon notice, there is a hold icon notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold icon change notice is given when the hold icon is shifted. For example, as shown in FIG. 31 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 29 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 31 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the variation icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. 31 (D). The hold icon HA3 is moved to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 is moved to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 31 (D)) (hold icon notice is performed). ).

Further, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the hold icon notice so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal embodiment, and green, red, and gold are special embodiments. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set so as to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

The look-ahead effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute the operation by using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as the effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues uninterrupted from the execution such as the hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA until the special figure change display is started, the effect symbol is stopped. It may be an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the display is performed or every time the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 32 to 42. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. appearing in the control of the game by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 190 to the game control board 100, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 32 from the game ROM 103.

As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, the game control microcomputer 101 first prohibits interrupts (S1), and then sets access to the game RAM 104 to allow (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value setting operation for setting the set value has been performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 is pressed. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S4 if it determines that the set value setting operation has not been performed, and proceeds to step S7 if it determines that the set value setting operation has been performed, and proceeds to step S7 to set the set value. After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The setting value setting process will be described later.

In step S4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a setting process of the game RAM 104 for setting an initial value in a used area of the game RAM 104 that requires an initial value, and in step S5, a power recovery command is issued to the game RAM 104. It is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the effect control board 120, and in step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87, and the step. Proceed to S10.

Further, in step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the used area of the game RAM 104, performs the setting process of the game RAM 104 to set the initial value in the used area of the game RAM 104 that requires the initial value, and then performs the setting process. In step S9, the RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a CTC activation setting process for setting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: circuit for managing interrupt time) or the like to be used in step S10, and permits interrupts in step S11.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process in step S12. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information are added by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S13 whether or not the power supply has been cut off. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 190. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply has not been cut off, the process proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply has been cut off, the interrupt is prohibited in step S14, the access to the game RAM 104 is prohibited in step S15, and the data stored in the game RAM 104 is stored. Is stored as backup data, and then waits for the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to be cut off.

[Set value setting process]
Next, the set value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. 33. In the set value setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 first stores the set value data backed up in the game RAM 104 in the set value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the set value indicated by the set value data. It is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S52 whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the set value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55, and if it is determined that the set value switch 71 has been operated, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S53 that the set value storage unit of the game RAM 104 has been operated. The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is increased by "1" to set a new set value, and in step S54, the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87.

In the basic embodiment, the set value is set in 6 stages of 1 to 6, and when the set value switch 71 is operated when the set value is "6", the set value "1" is newly set. Will be. The mode of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 71 is not limited to "1" increase, but may be "1" decrease or random change.

In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not there has been an operation for confirming the set value. Specifically, in the game control microcomputer 101, the set value cylinder 70 is turned off based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, that is, has the set value cylinder 70 been rotated from the set state to return to the basic state? Judge whether or not. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S52 when it is determined that there is no operation for confirming the set value, and when it is determined that there is an operation for confirming the set value, it is stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 in step S56. The set value specification command indicating the set value indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the set value setting process is completed, and the process returns to the game control main process.

By performing a rotation operation for shifting the set value cylinder 70 from the set state to the reference state according to step S55, the set value setting process is completed and the set value is confirmed. Therefore, this operation confirms the set value. It can be positioned as an operation to make it. On the other hand, the rotation operation for changing the set value cylinder 70 from the reference state to the set state according to step S3 can be positioned as an operation for setting the set value. In the following, the former operation is referred to as a "set value confirmation operation" of the set value cylinder 70, and the latter operation is referred to as a "set value setting operation" of the set value cylinder 70.

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the game control board 100, so that the game control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. 34 is interrupted. Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 34, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an output process (S101) in the game control side timer interrupt process. In the output process, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses the lower plate full data as the lower plate full data in the game RAM 104. Store in the output buffer.

The normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) performed next is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the game control main process of FIG. 32. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal figure-related judgment information and the special figure-related judgment information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and other periods (after the game control side timer interrupt process is completed). , The period until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) to end the game control side timer interrupt processing. Other processes include updating the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104. In addition, as another process, a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of the game control main processes S13 to S14 until the interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the clock pulse is input, the game control is performed again. Executes side timer interrupt processing. The game control microcomputer 101 outputs a command or the like set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process executed again. ..

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 36. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. General prize-winning prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "3") corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status described later is 1, in other words, whether or not the variable display of the normal figure or the auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and if the normal operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F). The normal symbol random number indicated by the above is acquired as the normal diagram-related determination information (S205), and the acquired normal symbol-related determination information is stored in the normal diagram holding storage unit 86 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206). Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

Next, when the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) for counting the special figure 2 hold number provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "4" or more (less than "4"), the process proceeds to step S214. NO in S209), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second look-ahead determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start-up winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "4") corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 hold (specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104 (special figure 1 hold number counter)) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S216). If the number of special figure 1 hold is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of special figure 1 hold is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S216). ), The special figure 1 hold number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first start winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the storage area of the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a according to the current number of special figure 1 hold (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a. If the game ball has not won in the large winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the game ball has won in the large winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the game RAM 104 has been reached. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the big winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the basic embodiment, the winning rule number is set to "8". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the big prize opening winning counter is "9" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". If (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S223), and the large winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), End the sensor detection process. In the large prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "14") corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the sensor detecting the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 36 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation processing related to the control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, the processing related to the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the normal map and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 86. Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, and the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal map display 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation start command according to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map variation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is variablely displayed. In the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed since the execution of the normal map variation display started (whether or not the normal map variation display is terminated), and the normal symbol variation processing is performed. If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop display of the normal figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map fluctuation display.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running normal figure started (whether to end the stop display of the normal figure). Whether or not) is determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal figure displayed as stopped is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4" and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game is completed, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, the special operation processing relating to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, the processing related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game control process to perform a jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are completed and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

Further, in the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 39. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). When the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 1 It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer wait flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol wait process is completed, and if the customer wait flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer wait command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , The customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start. When there is one or more stores of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the earliest stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a is read out, and the jackpot determination table associated with the current set value is read. Further, based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (big hit symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. 40. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the state is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is “big hit”. If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), it is for the big hit symbol from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the variation pattern determination table in Special Figure 1 (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) to determine whether or not there is reach.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of special figure 1 holdes is confirmed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used. Select (S1657) the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reserved special figures 1 and then proceed to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1569, and then collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation according to the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the set special figure 1 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the special map fluctuation pattern including information on the presence or absence of reach and the special map fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a to the side read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 is changed by subtracting "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613) and decreasing the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 83a by "1" (S1613). S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is completed without executing step S1617.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 is stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically performed except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Since the process is the same as S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the change display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure change pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. A special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process for clearing the storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is performed (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606), and reduces and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b by "1" (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. Further, in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold may be executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold. Further, the digestion of the special figure 1 hold and the digestion of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 81. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol corresponding to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the special symbol ends is output as an output buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol change processing is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1751), when the stop display of the special symbol is terminated by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) is currently present. It is determined whether or not it is (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON). Whether or not it is determined (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1753), the rest of the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time reduction remaining number counter (number of time reduction remaining) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time reduction remaining number) is "0" (in S1755). YES), the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. Is determined (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (YES). The normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to “4” (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. (Time from being done to starting one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Production control by production control board 120 [Production control main processing]
Next, the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, buffer and the like appearing in the following description of the effect control by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 43 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the effect control main process, first, the power-on process is performed according to the power-on (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the effect CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations related to various effects are updated. The random numbers for effect determination include various random numbers for determining the effect content, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special figure variation effect pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, and a round effect start, which will be described later). A command, an ending effect start command, etc.) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the effect control board 120 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the sound control circuit 161 (execute various effects by sound), and the sub drive board, together with various effects performed by the image control board 140. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via 162 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, big hit ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like.

The effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a 1 msec cycle is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 emits light emission data created by the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the effect of the image. Is output to the sub drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are performed based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the effect content or the like indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 47. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if the start winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command hold storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree. The look-ahead effect includes a hold icon notice that displays the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the special symbol, and the like. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the pre-reading effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls voice according to the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the pre-reading effect is performed by the image performed by the image control board 140. The speaker 52 outputs the sound via the circuit 161 (executes the look-ahead effect by the sound), and the frame lamp 53 emits light via the sub drive board 162 (executes the look-ahead effect by the light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (execute the look-ahead effect by the operation).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol specification command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the symbol specification command (YES in S4303), the effect control command is issued to the effect RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the production content of the special figure change effect is determined. , The special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the content of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, lost special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command. ~ EZ3 and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is set in a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Value) is distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation without reach, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have a so-called “separate stitch”. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to obtain so-called "doublets" according to the effect mode and the type of the jackpot symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode in which the effect is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Select the special figure variation effect pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation effect pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, one or a plurality of special figure variation effect pattern is set to a random number value for special figure variation effect pattern determination (special figure variation effect pattern) so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Judgment value) is distributed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and the special figure is based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern is judged.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern table in the special figure variation effect pattern determination, and determines and determines the special figure variation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image of the above is read out, and the special figure variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, in addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect start command includes the special figure variation effect by the voice output from the speaker 52 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect content of the figure variation effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. The voice is output from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 (the special figure variation effect by the voice is executed), and the frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via the sub drive board 162 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect) and operate the board movable body 55k (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), it proceeds to step S4309, while if it has received the special figure fluctuation stop command (YES in S4307), the special figure fluctuation The special figure variation effect end process (S4308) for ending the effect (stops the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and performs the stop display) is performed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure variation stop command in the special figure variation effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbol KZ1). ~ Stop the variation display of KZ3) Set the special figure variation effect end command in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the command to end the special symbol variation effect, the image control board 140 ends the special symbol variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, while if the game state command has been received (YES in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability high-base game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "02H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low-probability high-base game state.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if the effect waiting command has been received (YES in S4311), the effect waiting effect waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process is completed.

In the customer waiting effect waiting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the waiting time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect is issued to the effect RAM 124. Set in the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), the process proceeds to step S4315, while if the opening command has been received (YES in S4313), the jackpot game accompanies the start of the jackpot game. The opening effect start process is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening effect start process, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on based on the analysis result. If you want to execute it, select the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern), and output the jackpot opening effect start command to start the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern. Set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game control board 100 has received the round number designation command, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

In the round effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command, determines whether or not to execute the round effect according to the round game to be started, and if it is executed, the round effect. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the process proceeds to step S4320, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process (S4318) accompanying the start of the ending of the jackpot game. , And the effect mode setting process (S4319).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and if it is executed. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command in the effect mode setting process (effect mode). Process to control).

For example, if the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the probability variation effect mode suggesting a high probability and high base game state. Then, the effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The probabilistic background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probabilistic BGM is output as the BGM.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot symbol E, or the jackpot symbol F, the high probability high base game state or the low probability high base Set a time saving effect mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which of the game states it is. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns on the effect mode flag indicating the time reduction effect mode in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and issues a time reduction effect mode start command indicating that the time reduction effect mode is set to the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

In step S4320, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the set value designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the set value designation command has been stored in the receive buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the set value specification command (NO in S4320), it finishes the received command analysis process, while it has received the set value specification command (YES in S4320), the set value is specified. The set value setting process for storing the set value flag representing the set value indicated by the command in the set value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 is performed (S4321), and the received command analysis process is completed.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the first embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes the set value effect related to the set value based on the number of game balls discharged out of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. In the first embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

As described in the basic embodiment, a sensor for detecting a winning game ball is provided in the first starting port 11 such as the first starting port sensor 11a and the second starting port sensor 12a, the second starting port 12, and the like. ing. In the first embodiment, in addition to the sensor that detects the winning game ball like these sensors, as shown in FIG. 48, the game ball that is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 is An out sensor 19a for detecting is provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14, and the game ball that has entered the out opening 19 are games. The spheres are collected in one path (not shown) that allows them to flow down. An out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball is provided on this path. In the following, a game ball discharged out of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 is referred to as an “out ball”.

With the provision of the out sensor 19a, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process in step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 49, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred, in other words, whether or not the out sensor 19a has detected the game ball as step S225. Judge whether or not. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that an out ball has not occurred (NO in S225), the sensor detection process ends as it is, while when it determines that an out ball has occurred, it is determined in step S226 that an out ball has occurred. The indicated out designation command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the sensor detection process is completed. The game ball set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output process in step S107.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the number of generated out spheres based on the received out sphere command. Then, when the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches 50,000, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute the set value effect suggesting the set value in the jackpot opening effect related to the jackpot. For example, in the set value effect, as shown in FIG. 50, a number of fireworks images G20 corresponding to the set value are displayed. That is, the number of displayed fireworks images G20 suggests a set value.

If the set value "1" is set, one fireworks image G20 is displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (see FIG. 50 (A)). Similarly, if the set value "2" to the set value "6" are set, 2 to 6 fireworks images G20 are displayed in addition to the jackpot opening effect in which the set value effect is not performed (FIG. 50). (B) to FIG. 50 (F)).

The process for performing the set value effect of the first embodiment can be appropriately set. For example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with an out ball counter for counting out balls. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out-ball command has been received after step S4321 of the reception command analysis process, and if it is determined that the out-ball command has been received, the out-ball counter is added by "1". Perform the processing. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the counter value of the out-ball counter is 50,000, that is, whether or not 50,000 out-balls have occurred, and the counter value of the out-ball counter is 50,000. If it is determined to be present, a process of setting a set value effect flag for performing a set value effect in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 is performed.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the presence / absence of the set value effect flag in the opening effect start process, and if the set value effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect according to the set value indicated by the set value flag. In order to execute the image control board 140, a set value effect start command corresponding to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the number of fireworks images G20 corresponding to the set value in the jackpot opening effect based on the received set value effect start command.

As described above, by executing the set value effect based on the number of out balls, the game balls that have been fired but have entered the out port 19 are not wasted, so that the player's willingness to play is not wasted. It is possible to improve the occupancy rate and improve the game entertainment by preventing the decline of the game. Furthermore, since winning a big hit is also included in the conditions for executing the set value effect, it is possible to maintain the motivation of the player for winning the big hit.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
The number of out spheres constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to 50,000, and may be appropriately set. Further, the number of out balls for executing the set value effect (hereinafter, referred to as “out ball determination value”) is not limited to one, and a plurality of out balls may be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 51, the out-ball determination value may be associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 51, the out-ball determination value may increase as the set value increases. By doing so, for example, when the jackpot game is performed when the number of out balls is less than 34,000, but the set value effect is not executed, at least the setting value "1" which is the most disadvantageous to the player is not set. Is confirmed, so that the player can feel reassured.

Further, the out-ball determination values constituting the execution condition of the set value effect are set to 40,000 and 60,000. Then, when the number of out balls reaches 40,000 and a big hit is won, it is suggested that the set value is any of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value. 1 Perform set value production. In this case, there are two types of effect modes of the first set value effect. In one effect mode, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and in the other effect mode, the set value is. It is a relatively high value of 4 to 6. Next, when the out-ball determination value reaches 60,000 and a big hit is won, a second set value effect suggesting that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three types of effect modes of the second set value effect, the set value is either 1 or 4 in one effect mode, and the set value is 2 or 5 in another effect mode. If it is any of the above and the remaining production modes, the set value may be either 3 or 6. In this way, the set value may be suggested step by step by executing the set value effect.

Further, although the set value effect is executed in the jackpot opening effect, the effect time of the set value effect is not limited to the jackpot opening effect, and may be a round effect or a jackpot ending effect. Furthermore, the set value effect can be executed in the jackpot opening effect of any jackpot game, but only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state. , The set value effect may be configured to be executable. On the contrary, the set value effect may be configured to be executable only in a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a low probability and high base game state.

Further, two types of out-ball determination values, which are threshold values for executing the set value effect, may be provided, and the type of jackpot that is a condition for executing the set value effect may be different depending on the out-ball determination value. After the number of out balls reaches 30,000, it is set based on winning a specific jackpot related to a specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively large number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state. Make value effects feasible. On the other hand, after the number of out balls reaches 60,000, a non-specific jackpot related to a non-specific jackpot game such as a jackpot game with a relatively small number of rounds or a jackpot game with a high probability high base game state is won. The set value effect can be executed based on. It should be noted that the size of the number of out balls, which is the threshold value for executing the set value effect, and the type of the jackpot for executing the set value effect may be exchanged.

Further, the set value effect is executed in the jackpot game when the jackpot is won after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, but the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect related to the jackpot winning. Is also good. In this case, the execution time of the set value effect is not limited, but at a specific time such as when the special figure variation effect is started, when the reach is established, when the SP reach effect is developed, or when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed. You may set it.

In addition, the set value effect is a specific effect such as SP reach or a specific SP reach, which suggests that the jackpot expectation is high after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, regardless of the jackpot determination result. May be executed by executing. In this case, for example, if a specific SP reach having a relatively high expectation of a big hit is executed in the SP reach after the number of out balls reaches the out ball determination value, the set value is set in the specific SP reach. You may perform the production.

Further, although the set value effect suggests the set value by the number of fireworks images G20, the effect mode suggesting the set value is not limited to the number of fireworks images G20, and may be appropriately set. For example, the set value effect may suggest the set value depending on other effect modes such as the size and color of the fireworks image G20. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board movable device 55 in place of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. ..

Further, six types of effect modes are set in the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, but a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of effect modes, the first effect mode is associated with the set value "1" and the set value "2", and the second effect mode is associated with the set value "3" and the set value "3". 4 ”is associated with each other, and the set value “5” and the set value “6” may be associated with the third effect mode. Further, the set value "1" and the set value "6" are associated with the first effect mode, and the set value "2" and the set value "5" are associated with the second effect mode. The set value "3" and the set value "4" may be associated with the third effect mode.

Alternatively, there are six types of effect modes, and all the set values are associated with each effect mode, but the possibility of the set values set may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, as the effect mode of the set value effect, the first effect mode to the sixth effect mode are set, and the setting value "1"> the setting value "2"> the setting value "3"> the setting value "4"> the setting. There is a high possibility that the setting value effect of the first effect mode will be executed in the order of the value "5"> the setting value "6", and the setting value "6"> the setting value "5"> the setting value "4"> the setting. The value "3"> the set value "2"> the set value "1" may be configured so that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is likely to be executed.

Further, the set value effect may not be executed independently of the jackpot opening effect or SP reach effect, but may be executed by incorporating it into the jackpot opening effect or SP reach effect. For example, a set value effect suggesting a set value depending on the color, size, display position, etc. of the opening image G1 or the right-handed image G2, or the type of the appearing character may be executed.

Further, a sensor is provided that detects only the game balls that have entered the out port 19 without detecting the game balls that have won in the first starting port 11 or the like, and is based on the number of game balls that have entered the out port 19. , The set value effect may be executed in the same manner as the above-mentioned set value effect.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention. Also in the second embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 executes the set value effect regarding the set value based on the game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6. The second embodiment mainly describes the differences from the first embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the second embodiment as well, the out sensor 19a is provided as in the first embodiment. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process, and if it determines that an out ball has occurred, sets an out designation command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sends a general winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 to the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the general winning opening winning ball processing (S202) of the sensor detection process. set. Further, in the game control microcomputer 101, in the large prize opening prize ball processing (S224) of the sensor detection process, the large winning opening winning command indicating that the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14 is sent to the output buffer of the game RAM 104. set.

Here, the game ball that has entered the game area 6 enters any of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, or the out opening 19, and enters the game area 6. Since it is discharged to the outside of the game, the number of out balls can be said to be the number of game balls that have been normally launched and have entered the game area 6. Therefore, the number of out balls can be positioned as the number of fired game balls. In the following, the number of game balls fired normally is also referred to as "the number of fired balls".

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 counts the difference number, which is the difference between the number of fired balls and the acquired number of prize balls. The number of prize balls acquired is the number of prize balls acquired by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14. The number of prize balls for winning can be set as appropriate, but in the above-mentioned example, when a game ball enters the general winning opening 10, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. Similarly, when a game ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when a game ball enters the large prize opening 14, 14 game balls are paid out as prize balls. Then, it is assumed that the number of fired balls is represented by a negative value and the number of prize balls is represented by a positive value. Then, for example, 12,000 game balls are fired, three balls are entered into the general winning opening 10, 150 balls are entered into the first starting opening 11, five balls are entered into the second starting opening 12, and a large winning opening is entered. It is assumed that 45 balls are entered in 14. In this case, the difference number is (3 × 3) + (4 × 150) + (4 × 5) + (14 × 45) -12000 = −10741.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect when the number of differences reaches −20000. Unlike the first embodiment, the set value effect can be executed at any of the special figure variation effect, the jackpot game effect, and the demo effect. In the set value effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 52, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value. That is, the height at which the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed suggests a set value. More specifically, as the set value increases, the position where the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed increases.

For example, when the special figure fluctuation effect is performed and the difference number reaches -20,000, if the set value "1" is set, the image of a small unmanned aerial vehicle at the lowest height among the set values. G21 appears at the right end of the display unit 50a, moves toward the left, and disappears from the left end so as to cross the display unit 50a from right to left. (See FIG. 52 (A)). Similarly, if the set value "6" is set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at the highest height among the set values (see FIG. 52 (F)). Further, if the set value "2" to the set value "5" are set, the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 is displayed at a height corresponding to the set value (see FIGS. 52 (B) to 52 (E)). ).

The process for performing the set value effect of the second embodiment can be appropriately set. For example, the effect RAM 124 is provided with a difference number counter for counting the difference number. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the out-ball command has been received, and if it is determined that the command has been received, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process of subtracting "1" from the difference number counter. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the reception command analysis process whether or not the general winning opening winning command is received, and if it is determined that the command is received, the difference number counter is added by "3". conduct. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the reception command analysis process whether or not the large winning opening winning command is received, and if it is determined that the command is received, the difference number counter is added by "14". conduct. In addition, when it is determined in step S4301 of the reception command analysis process that the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command, for example, after the start winning process, the difference number counter is added by "4". Perform processing.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the set value effect determination process, for example, after step S4203 of the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012). In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a process of determining whether or not the counter value of the difference number counter is −20000, that is, whether or not the difference number has reached −20000. .. Subsequently, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the counter value of the difference number counter is −20000, the effect control board 140 causes the image control board 140 to execute the set value effect according to the set value indicated by the set value flag. The set value effect start command according to the set value is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set value effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, the image control board 140 appropriately displays the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21 at a height corresponding to the set value based on the received set value effect start command.

As described above, by executing the set value effect based on the difference number in which the out ball is reflected, the game ball that has been fired but has entered the out port 19 is not wasted. It is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's willingness to play, improve the operating rate, and improve the interest in playing games.

(Example of modification of the second embodiment)
The number of differences constituting the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to −20000, and may be appropriately set. For example, the number of differences for executing the set value effect (hereinafter, referred to as “difference number determination value”) is not limited to one, and may be set to a plurality. For example, as shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may be associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 53, the difference number determination value may decrease as the set value increases. By doing so, for example, when the difference number reaches -12000, but the set value effect is not executed, at least it is determined that the set value is not the most disadvantageous setting value "1", so that the player Can give a sense of security. Increasing the number of differences is a difficult situation for the player, but since the set value is higher as the situation becomes longer, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's willingness to play.

Further, the difference number determination values are set to -15000 and -30000. Then, when the number of differences reaches -15000, the first set value effect suggesting whether the set value is any of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6, in other words, a relatively low value or a high value is performed. conduct. In this case, there are two types of effect modes of the first set value effect. In one effect mode, the set value is a relatively low value of 1 to 3, and in the other effect mode, the set value is. It is a relatively high value of 4 to 6. Next, when the number of differences reaches −30000, a second set value effect suggesting that the set value is any one of 1 to 3 or 4 to 6 is performed. In this case, there are three types of effect modes of the second set value effect, the set value is either 1 or 4 in one effect mode, and the set value is 2 or 5 in another effect mode. If it is any of the above and the remaining production modes, the set value may be either 3 or 6. In this way, the set value may be suggested step by step by executing the set value effect.

Further, the set value effect suggests the set value by the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21, but the effect mode suggesting the set value is not limited to the display position of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21, and is appropriately set. Is also good. For example, the set value effect may suggest a set value depending on other effect modes such as the size, color, moving speed, or number of the small unmanned aerial vehicle image G21. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using another effect device such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the board movable device 55 in place of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. ..

In addition, six types of effect modes are set for the set value effect, and each effect mode and the set value are associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, but a plurality of set values are associated with one effect mode. May be. For example, there are three types of effect modes, the first effect mode is associated with the set value "1" and the set value "2", and the second effect mode is associated with the set value "3" and the set value "3". 4 ”is associated with each other, and the set value “5” and the set value “6” may be associated with the third effect mode. Further, the set value "1" and the set value "6" are associated with the first effect mode, and the set value "2" and the set value "5" are associated with the second effect mode. The set value "3" and the set value "4" may be associated with the third effect mode.

Alternatively, there are six types of effect modes, and all the set values are associated with each effect mode, but the possibility of the set values set may differ depending on the effect mode. For example, as the effect mode of the set value effect, the first effect mode to the sixth effect mode are set, and the setting value "1"> the setting value "2"> the setting value "3"> the setting value "4"> the setting. There is a high possibility that the setting value effect of the first effect mode will be executed in the order of the value "5"> the setting value "6", and the setting value "6"> the setting value "5"> the setting value "4"> the setting. The value "3"> the set value "2"> the set value "1" may be configured so that the set value effect of the sixth effect mode is likely to be executed.

Further, the difference number, which is the execution condition of the set value effect, reflects the number of prize balls of the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, and the large winning opening 14, but the difference number. The type of prize ball to be reflected in may be limited to a part. For example, only the prize balls obtained by entering the large winning opening 14 may be reflected in the difference number, which is the execution condition of the set value effect. Alternatively, the difference number, which is the execution condition of the set value effect, may reflect only the prize balls obtained by entering the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, and the second starting opening 12.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the third embodiment can execute variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with an image different from the basic embodiment described above. Then, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed by using the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In the third embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

First, the effect symbols constituting the set value effect will be described. As the effect symbols related to the set value effect, as shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (C), there are a first composite symbol G221, a second composite symbol G222, and a third composite symbol G223. The first composite symbol G221 is used in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the first normal effect stage. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 is used in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the second normal effect stage. The third composite symbol G223 is used in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the third normal effect stage. Hereinafter, the first composite symbol G221, the second composite symbol G222, and the third composite symbol G223 are collectively referred to as “composite symbol G22”.

The first composite symbol G221 has a first lottery result suggestion unit G221a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a first set value suggestion unit G221b for suggesting a set value. Similarly, the second composite symbol G222 has a second lottery result suggestion unit G222a for suggesting a special figure lottery result, and a second set value suggestion unit G222b for suggesting a set value. Further, the third composite symbol G223 has a third lottery result suggestion unit G223a for suggesting a special figure lottery result and a third set value suggestion unit G223b for suggesting a set value.

In the following, the first lottery result suggestion unit G221a, the second lottery result suggestion unit G222a, and the third lottery result suggestion unit G223a are collectively referred to as "lottery result suggestion unit G22a". Further, the first set value suggestion unit G221b, the second set value suggestion unit G222b, and the third set value suggestion unit G223b are collectively referred to as "set value suggestion unit G22b".

The lottery result suggestion unit G22a is role-wise the same as the effect symbols G10 used for the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the basic embodiment and the first to second embodiments. Therefore, it can be said that the composite symbol G22 is configured by adding the set value suggestion unit G22b to the effect symbols G10 in the basic embodiment and the first to second embodiments.

The first lottery result suggestion unit G221a is composed of an image in which the numbers "1" to "9" are superimposed on a baseball ball, as in the basic embodiment. Similarly, the second lottery result suggestion unit G222a is composed of an image in which the numbers “1” to “9” are superimposed on the baseball glove. Further, the third lottery result suggestion unit G223a is composed of an image in which the numbers "1" to "9" are superimposed on the baseball hat.

The number part of the first lottery result suggestion unit G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a shown in FIGS. 54 (A) to 54 (C) is "1", but the number part is "1". The first lottery result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a in a certain case are exemplified, and this number part is composed of "2" to "9" as in a basic embodiment. 1 Lottery result suggestion unit G221a to 3rd lottery result suggestion unit G223a are also provided. Further, as in the case of the basic embodiment, the numbers "3" and "7" of the first lottery result suggestion section G221a to the third lottery result suggestion section G223a are composed of red, and the first lottery is performed. The other numerical parts of the result suggestion part G221a to the third lottery result suggestion part G223a are composed of blue.

The first set value suggestion unit G221b, the second set value suggestion unit G222b, and the third set value suggestion unit G223b are composed of the same image representing a shutter that can be opened and closed in the vertical direction. 54 (A) to 54 (C) show the first composite symbol G221 to the third composite symbol G223 in a state where the shutters of the first set value suggestion unit G221b to the third set value suggestion unit G223b are closed. There is. Here, taking the first composite symbol G221 as an example, when the shutter of the first set value suggestion unit G221b is opened, the first set value suggestion unit G221b is any one of FIGS. 54 (D) to 54 (F). It becomes a state. Specifically, when the shutter of the first set value suggestion unit G221b is opened, "○" is displayed in the first set value suggestion unit G221b (FIG. 54 (D)), and "Δ" is displayed. (FIG. 54 (E)) and "x" are displayed (FIG. 54 (F)).

The second set value suggestion unit G222b and the third set value suggestion unit G223b also display “◯”, “Δ”, and “×” in the same manner as the first set value suggestion unit G221b. In the following, "○" displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b is referred to as "first set value symbol G23a", and "△" displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b is referred to as "second set value symbol". It is referred to as "G23b", and the "x" displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b is referred to as "third set value symbol G23c". Further, the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c are collectively referred to as "set value symbol G23".

Further, since the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggestion unit G22a constitute identification information for suggesting the special figure lottery result, the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggestion unit G22a are referred to as "lottery result information". That is. Further, since "○", "Δ", and "×" displayed in the set value suggestion unit G22b constitute information for suggesting the set value, “○” displayed in the set value suggestion unit G22b. , "△", and "×" are called "set value information".

The shutter of the set value suggestion unit G22b opens when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22. Then, when the shutter of the set value suggestion unit G22b is opened, the set value is suggested by the combination of the set value symbol G23 displayed on each of the set value suggestion units G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. That is, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value symbol G23 is displayed in each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which constitutes the set value effect.

Regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, any of the first set value symbol G23a to the third set value symbol G23c can be displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b. Therefore, there are 27 types of combinations of the set value symbol G23, which is the effect content of the set value effect. In the following, the combination of the set value symbol G23 is also referred to as a “set value symbol pattern”.

Further, in the third embodiment, the set value effect is executed in the same manner every time the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed regardless of the type of the composite symbol G22, that is, regardless of the type of the effect stage. To. That is, the set value effect is executed according to the special figure variation effect. The set value symbol pattern is selected each time the special symbol variation effect is executed. Which set value symbol pattern is selected is determined based on the set value. The selection rate for each set value symbol pattern differs depending on the set value. Since the selection rate for the set value symbol pattern differs depending on the set value, the set value is suggested by the set value symbol pattern of the set value effect to be executed.

FIG. 55 shows the selection rate for each set value symbol pattern for each set value. Here, the column of "combination of set value symbols" in FIG. 55 represents a combination of three set value symbols G23, and the left end is the set value symbol G23 displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b of the left effect symbol EZ1. The center represents the set value symbol G23 displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b of the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right end represents the set value symbol G23 displayed in the set value suggestion portion G22b of the right effect symbol EZ3. ..

The selection rate of this set value symbol pattern is set appropriately. For example, when the combination of the set value symbol G23 is “○ ・ ○ ・ ○”, the set value “6” = the set value “5”> the set value. There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 1 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of "4" = set value "3"> set value "2" = set value "1". That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. Similarly, when the combination of the set value symbol G23 is "× ・ × ・ ×", the set value "1" = the set value "2"> the set value "3" = the set value "4"> the set value "5". = There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 27 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of the set value “6”. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order. When the combination of the set value symbol G23 is "△, △, △", the set value "3" = the set value "4"> the set value "1" = the set value "2" = the set value "5" = There is a high probability that the set value symbol pattern 14 corresponding to the combination is selected in the order of the set value “6”. That is, there is a high possibility that the set values are set in this order.

Here, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. Here, a specific example in which the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect of the loss without reach in the first normal effect stage will be described. For example, after the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed as shown in FIG. 56 (A) and the temporary stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed as shown in FIG. 56 (B). , When the fluctuation of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is stopped and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, the set value effect is executed.

Specifically, when the stop display of the effect diagram effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, as shown in FIGS. 56 (C) to 56 (E), the shutter closed by the set value suggestion unit G22b until that time. Opens, and the set value symbol G23 is displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3.

In FIG. 56, the same set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value suggestion unit G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 as the set value effect, but the set value suggestion unit G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is displayed. In some cases, different types of set value symbols G23 may be displayed. Further, the same type of set value symbol G23 may be displayed in two of the set value suggestion units G22b related to the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and a different type of set value symbol G23 may be displayed in the remaining one. ..

Further, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the special figure variation effect of the loss without reach, but the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is also performed in the special figure variation effect of the loss with reach and the jackpot. At that time, the set value effect based on the set set value is executed. Further, in FIG. 56, the set value effect is executed in the first normal effect stage, but similarly, when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the second normal effect stage and the third normal effect stage. , The set value effect is executed based on the set value. However, if it is the second normal effect stage, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed and the set value effect is performed using the second composite symbol G222. Further, in the case of the third normal effect stage, variable display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and set value effect using the third composite symbol G223 are performed.

Next, a process of determining the set value symbol pattern by the effect control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to FIG. 57. The set value symbol pattern is determined in the stop symbol pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special symbol variation effect start process. That is, the stop symbol pattern determination process of the third embodiment is different from the stop symbol pattern determination process of the above-mentioned basic embodiment.

In the effect control microcomputer 121, in the stop symbol pattern determination process, first, as step S5001, the content of the stop special symbol (big hit symbol type or loss special diagram) indicated by the stored symbol designation command and the special symbol change start command indicate. Based on the special figure fluctuation pattern, a lottery result information determination table for determining which lottery result information is used to display the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 58, the lottery result information determination table includes a lottery result information determination table used when the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, and the stop special symbols are the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C. When the lottery result information judgment table used when the jackpot symbol E or the jackpot symbol F is used, the lottery result information judgment table used when the special figure fluctuation pattern is lost with reach, and when the special figure fluctuation pattern is lost without reach. There is a lottery result information determination table used for.

A plurality of lottery result information determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one lottery result information determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each lottery result information determination table, the numbers displayed in the lottery result suggestion unit G22a related to each of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that specifically represent the lottery result information so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. The value of the random number for determining the lottery result information (lottery result information determination value) is distributed. The stop symbol pattern is associated with each lottery result information as identification information for identifying the lottery result information.

The effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the lottery result information determination random number counter as a lottery result information determination random number in step S5002, and the lottery result information based on the acquired lottery result information determination random number in step S5003. Make a judgment. The random number counter for determining the lottery result information is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

In the lottery result information determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired lottery result information determination random numbers with the selected lottery result information determination table, and determines the lottery result information related to the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. .. Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the data representing the determined lottery result information in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in step S5004. In the following, the data representing the determined lottery result information is referred to as "lottery result information data".

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the set value symbol pattern determination table based on the set value indicated by the set value flag set in step S5005. As described above, the set value symbol pattern determination table includes the set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is "1", the set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is "2", and the set value. The setting value symbol pattern judgment table used when the setting value is "3", the setting value symbol pattern judgment table used when the setting value is "4", the setting value symbol pattern judgment table used when the setting value is "5", and There is a set value symbol pattern determination table used when the set value is "6".

A plurality of set value symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the set value. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value. In each set value symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for setting value symbol pattern determination (set value symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to the set value symbol pattern so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 55. There is.

The effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the set value symbol pattern determination random number counter as the set value symbol pattern determination random number in step S5006, and based on the acquired set value symbol pattern determination random number in step S5007. Set value Design pattern judgment is performed. The set value symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

In the set value symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired set value symbol pattern determination random number with the selected set value symbol pattern determination table, and determines the set value symbol pattern. Then, in step S5008, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the data representing the determined set value symbol pattern in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In the following, the data representing the determined set value symbol pattern is referred to as "set value symbol pattern data".

Finally, in step S5009, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect symbol command indicating the lottery result information pattern and the set value symbol pattern in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and ends the stop symbol pattern determination process.

When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect image from the image ROM 142. Is read out, and the lottery result information pattern indicated by the effect symbol command and the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 by the set value symbol pattern are displayed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, and the lottery result information pattern is small. The stop display of the symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed.

Although not shown, for example, when L reach or SP reach is executed, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are reduced, and the left effect symbol EZ1 moves to the upper left corner of the display unit 50a. The right effect symbol EZ3 moves to the upper right corner of the display unit 50a. At this time, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 may be composed of only the number portion of the lottery result suggestion portion G22a, and may be simplified as compared with before entering the L reach or SP reach.

As described above, since the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 executed along with the variable display of the special figure, the game entertainment is improved and the game is played. It is possible to prevent getting bored with. In particular, this effect is basically effective when the loss without reach continues repeatedly and lightly.

Further, the set value effect is executed along with the variable display of the special symbol as in the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but is executed in the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It has not been. As described above, since the set value effect is not executed in duplicate, it is possible to prevent the set value effect from becoming troublesome and the effect of the set value effect from being lowered.

(Example of modification of the third embodiment)
The set value effect in the third embodiment is executed by using the composite symbol G22, but the configuration of the composite symbol G22 is not limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, the set value suggestion unit G22b related to the set value effect is added to the lower end of the lottery result suggestion unit G22a, but the position of the set value suggestion unit G22b with respect to the lottery result suggestion unit G22a is appropriately set. Is also good. Specifically, the set value suggestion unit G22b may be arranged at the upper end portion, the right end portion, or the left end portion of the lottery result suggestion portion G22a. Alternatively, the set value suggestion unit G22b may be arranged so as to overlap the lottery result suggestion unit G22a. Further, the set value suggestion unit G22b is smaller than the lottery result suggestion unit G22a, but the size of the set value suggestion unit G22b with respect to the lottery result suggestion unit G22a is substantially the same as the lottery result suggestion unit G22a or the lottery result suggestion unit G22a. It may be set as appropriate, such as larger than.

Further, the set value effect is executed by using the composite symbol G22, but the effect symbol is used by using an image in which the set value suggestion unit G22b that suggests the set value effect is not provided, as in the basic embodiment. EZ1 to EZ3 may be executed, and the set value effect may be executed using a symbol different from the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. In this case, the set value effect may be executed by providing an area for the set value effect on the display unit 50a or by installing an image display device other than the image display device 50.

Further, the types of the set value symbol G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment are "○", "△", and "×", but some of them, or "◇" and "□". Other types such as may be added to execute the set value effect. Alternatively, the set value effect may be executed using an image completely different from "○", "Δ", and "×". Alternatively, the type of the set value symbol G23 related to the set value effect is set as one type, and only the frequency in which the one type of the set value symbol G23 is displayed together in all the set value suggestion units G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. You may suggest the setting value.

Further, the probabilities that the set value symbols G23 related to the set value effect of the third embodiment are uniformly displayed by all the set value suggestion units G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are the set value "1" and the set value "2". , Setting value "3" and setting value "4", and setting value "5" and setting value "6", respectively, in the same way, the setting value of 6 steps is changed to "small", "medium", and "high". Although it is set separately, this method of division is not limited to this and may be set as appropriate. For example, the probability that each set value symbol G23 is uniformly displayed by all the set value suggestion units G22b of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be set differently for each of the six set values, or may be set differently for each of the six stages. The set value may be divided into "small" and "high" of the set value "1" to the set value "3" and the set value "4" to the set value "6".

Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any of the special figure variation effects, but is not executed in the special figure variation effect of the jackpot or the special figure variation effect of L reach and SP reach. The execution condition of the value effect may be limited. Alternatively, at the start of the special figure variation effect, it may be determined whether or not to execute the set value effect, and the set value effect may be executed only when it is determined in the determination that the set value effect is to be executed. ..

Further, the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed in any of the normal effect stages of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage in the low-probability low-base gaming state, but only in a specific normal effect stage. It may be executed. Alternatively, as an effect stage in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a specific effect stage in which the set value effect is not executed in the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage and the set value effect can be executed is set as the first normal effect stage. -It may be provided in a place other than the third normal production stage, and when a specific condition is satisfied, the stage may be shifted to a specific production stage.

Specific conditions can be set as appropriate. For example, it is set that it is determined whether or not the specific condition is to be transferred to the specific effect stage at each end of the special figure variation effect related to the loss, and it is determined that the determination is to shift to the specific effect stage. Is also good. Further, a specific condition may be set to execute a specific effect such as an SP reach effect or a demo effect. Then, when the specific condition is satisfied, the special figure variation effect to be started next may be shifted to the specific effect stage. In this case, the background image may be a background image dedicated to a specific production stage. Alternatively, although the background image is not changed, the image used for the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be changed from the effect symbol G10 to the composite symbol G22.

Further, the set value effect is executed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed, but the execution time of the set value effect is not limited to this and may be appropriately set. For example, the execution time of the set value effect is set when the reach is established, and when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are temporarily stopped, the shutter of the set value suggestion unit G22b is opened and the first set value is set. Any of the symbol G23a, the second set value symbol G23b, and the third set value symbol G23c is displayed, and the set value displayed in the set value suggestion unit G22b related to the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at that time. The set value may be suggested by the combination of the symbols G23.

Further, the shutter is displayed on the set value suggestion unit G22b until the set value symbol G23 is displayed in the set value effect, and the set value symbol G23 is hidden, but during the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, The set value symbol G23 is visible, and may be variablely displayed, for example, like a reel or roulette of a so-called "rotating machine".

Further, although the set value effect of the third embodiment is executed only in the low-probability low-base gaming state, it may be executed even in the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state. Alternatively, although it is not executed in the low-probability low-base gaming state, it may be executed in the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fourth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the set value effect suggesting the set value under conditions different from those of the first to third embodiments described above. Specifically, the set value effect is executed based on the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. In the fourth embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

First, the number of executions of the special figure variable display that triggers the execution of the set value effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, when the number of executions of the special figure variable display after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is a specific number of times, if the jackpot is won, the set value effect is executed. In the following, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed after the power supply voltage is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is referred to as "the number of times after turning on".

The specific number of times is related to the so-called "doublet". The specific number of times includes the number of times after input consisting of the same odd number in the last three digits, the number of times after input consisting of the same even number in the last three digits, the number of times after input consisting of the same odd number in the last two digits, and the last two digits. There is the number of times after input, which consists of the same even number. In the following, the number of times after input consisting of the same odd number in the last three digits is referred to as "first odd number specified number of times", and the number of times after input consisting of even numbers having the same last three digits is referred to as "first even number specified number of times". The number of times after input is made up of odd numbers with the same last two digits is called "second odd number specified number", and the number of times after input is made up of even numbers with the same last two digits is called "second even number specified number of times". Called. The second odd-numbered specific number of times does not include the first odd-numbered specific number of times. Further, the second even-numbered specific number of times does not include the first even-numbered specific number of times.

Then, when the set value "3" or the set value "5" is set and the jackpot is won by the special figure variable display when the number of times after input is the first odd specific number of times, the effect control microcomputer 121 is the jackpot. In the jackpot game according to the above, the set value effect suggesting that the set value is 3 or 5 is executed. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. In the following, this set value effect is referred to as an “odd high setting suggestion effect”.

When the set value "4" or the set value "6" is set and the jackpot is won in the special figure variable display when the number of times after input is the first even specific number of times, the effect control microcomputer 121 is related to the jackpot. In the jackpot game, a set value effect suggesting that the set value is 4 or 6 is executed. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the final round game and the ending. In the following, this set value effect is referred to as an “even-numbered high setting suggestion effect”.

Then, when the set value "1", the set value "3", or the set value "5" is set and the jackpot is won by the special figure variable display when the number of times after input is the second odd specific number of times, it is for effect control. The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect suggesting that the set value is 1, 3, or 5 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. In the following, this set value effect is referred to as an “odd number setting suggestion effect”.

Then, when the set value "2", the set value "4", or the set value "6" is set and the jackpot is won by the special figure variable display when the number of times after input is the second even specific number of times, it is for effect control. The microcomputer 121 executes a set value effect suggesting that the set value is 2, 4, or 6 in the jackpot game related to the jackpot. Specifically, the set value effect is executed between the opening and one round. In the following, this set value effect is referred to as an “even number setting suggestion effect”.

Next, a specific example of the set value effect of the fourth embodiment will be described. First, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value "3" or the set value "5" is set and the number of times after input is the first odd specific number of times such as 555, 777, 1111, and 1333, the jackpot is won by the special figure variable display. Then. Here, when the variable display of the special figure related to the jackpot ends, the jackpot game is started next, the round game progresses, and the final round game is performed as shown in FIG. 59 (A).

Then, when the ending is started and the round effect is about to be switched to the jackpot ending effect, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), an image suggesting that the set value is 3 or 5 (hereinafter referred to as “odd high setting image G31”) is cut in to the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The odd-numbered height setting image G31 includes the back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “35”. This uniform number suggests that the set value is 3 or 5. Further, in the odd-numbered high setting image G31, the player is urged to pay attention to the number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the odd-numbered high setting image G31, that is, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the odd-numbered high setting image G31 is switched to the ending background image G202 as shown in FIG. 59 (C). The odd-numbered high setting image G31 is erased, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect ends, and the jackpot ending effect starts.

Next, the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, when the set value "4" or the set value "6" is set and the number of times after input is the first even specific number of times such as 666, 888, 1222, and 1444, the jackpot is won by the special figure variable display. Then. Here, when the variable display of the special figure related to the jackpot ends, the jackpot game is started next, the round game progresses, and the final round game is performed as shown in FIG. 60 (A).

Then, when the ending is started and the round effect is about to be switched to the jackpot ending effect, the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), an image suggesting that the set value is 2 or 4 (hereinafter referred to as “even high setting image G32”) is cut in to the entire display unit 50a. Is displayed.

The even-numbered height setting image G32 includes the back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “46”. This uniform number suggests that the set value is 4 or 6. Further, in the even-numbered height setting image G32, the athlete is urged to pay attention to the number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the even-numbered height setting image G32, that is, the even-numbered height setting suggestion effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even-numbered height setting image G32 is switched to the ending background image G202 as shown in FIG. 60 (C). The even-numbered height setting image G32 is erased, the even-numbered height setting suggestion effect ends, and the jackpot ending effect starts.

Next, the odd number setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, a special figure when the set value "1", the set value "3", or the set value "5" is set and the number of times after input is the second odd specific number of times such as 55, 77, 133, and 211. Suppose you win a big hit with a variable display. Here, when the variable display of the special figure related to the big hit is completed, the big hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 61 (A), the big hit opening effect is performed.

Then, when one round is started and the jackpot opening effect is about to be switched to the round effect, the odd number setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61B, an image suggesting that the set value is 1, 3 or 5 (hereinafter referred to as “odd number setting image G33”) is cut in the entire display unit 50a. It is displayed in.

The odd-numbered setting image G33 includes the back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number "135". This uniform number suggests that the set value is 1, 3 or 5. Further, in the odd-numbered setting image G33, the player is urged to pay attention to the number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the odd-numbered setting image G33, that is, the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the odd-numbered setting image G33 is switched to the round background image G201 as shown in FIG. G33 is erased, the odd number setting suggestion effect ends, and the round effect of one round starts.

Next, the even-numbered setting suggestion effect will be described. For example, a special figure when the set value "2", the set value "4", or the set value "6" is set and the number of times after input is the second even specific number of times such as 66, 88, 122, and 344. Suppose you win a big hit with a variable display. Here, when the variable display of the special figure related to the big hit is completed, the big hit game is started, and as shown in FIG. 62 (A), the big hit opening effect is performed.

Then, when one round is started and the jackpot opening effect is about to be switched to the round effect, the even number setting suggestion effect is executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), an image suggesting that the set value is 2, 4 or 6 (hereinafter referred to as “even number set image G34”) is cut in the entire display unit 50a. It is displayed in.

The even-numbered setting image G34 includes the back view of a player wearing a baseball uniform with a uniform number “246”. This uniform number suggests that the set value is 2, 4 or 6. Further, in the even-numbered setting image G34, the athlete is urged to pay attention to the number with the thumbs of both hands.

Then, when the cut-in display of the even-numbered setting image G34, that is, the even-numbered setting suggestion effect is performed for about 3 seconds, the even-numbered setting image G34 is switched to the round background image G201 as shown in FIG. G34 is erased, the even number setting suggestion effect ends, and the round effect of one round starts.

Next, a process of determining whether or not the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. 63. This process is executed as a set value effect determination process immediately after the special figure variation effect end process when it is determined in step S4305 of the receive command analysis process (S4201) that the special figure variation start command has been received.

In the set value effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first adds "1" to the counter value of the post-input count counter that counts the post-input frequency as step S5101. The post-turning count counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and "1" is added each time the set value effect determination process is performed.

Next, in step S5102, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the jackpot fluctuation will be started from now on, based on the stored special figure fluctuation start command or the like. When it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is not started, the effect control microcomputer 121 finishes the set value effect determination process, and when it is determined that the jackpot fluctuation is started, the effect counter is confirmed in step S5103 and the number of times after input is lower. Determine if the three digits are the same number.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the last three digits are not the same number, the process proceeds to step S5109, and when it is determined that the last three digits are the same number, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the post-input count counter in step S5104 and the last three digits. Determines if is an odd number of the same number. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the last three digits are not the same odd number, the process proceeds to step S5107, and when it is determined that the last three digits are the same odd number, the process proceeds to step S5105.

The effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag set in step S5105, and determines whether or not the set value is 3 or 5. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 3 nor 5, the process proceeds to step S5112, and when it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, in step S5106, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect flag is set for effect. It is set in the set value effect flag area of the RAM 124, and the set value effect determination process is completed.

The effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag set in step S5107, and determines whether or not the set value is 4 or 6. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 4 nor 6, the process proceeds to step S5114, and when it is determined that the set value is 3 or 5, the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect flag is set for effect in step S5108. It is set in the set value effect flag area of the RAM 124, and the set value effect execution determination process is completed.

Further, in step S5109, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the turn-on count counter and determines whether or not the last two digits of the turn-on count are the same number. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the last two digits are not the same number, the set value effect effect determination process is completed, and when it is determined that the last two digits are the same number, the effect counter is confirmed in step S5110. , Determine whether the last two digits are the same odd number. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5113 if it determines that the last two digits are not the same odd number, and proceeds to step S5111 if it determines that the last two digits are the same odd number.

The effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag set in step S5111, and determines whether or not the set value is 1, 3, or 5. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not 1, 3, or 5, the set value effect determination process is completed, and if it is determined that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112. ..

In step S5112, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the odd number setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag set in step S5113, and determines whether or not the set value is 2, 4, or 6. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is neither 2, 4, or 6, the set value effect determination process is completed, and if it is determined that the set value is 2, 4, or 6, the process proceeds to step S5114. ..

In step S5114, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the even number setting suggestion effect flag in the set value effect flag area of the effect RAM 124, and ends the set value effect determination process.

When the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect flag, the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect flag, the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect flag, or the even-numbered setting suggestion effect flag is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the set value effect flag in the jackpot game. , Odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect, even-numbered high setting suggestion effect, odd-numbered setting suggestion effect, or even-numbered setting suggestion effect is executed by the image control board 140.

For example, when the effect control microcomputer 121 is set with the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect flag or the even-numbered height setting suggestion effect flag, the odd number indicating the effect content of the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect in the ending effect start process (S4318). The high setting suggestion effect start command or the even high setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even high setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect start command or even-numbered high setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

Then, when the image control board 140 receives the odd-numbered height setting suggestion effect start command or the even-numbered height setting suggestion effect start command, the odd-numbered height setting image G31 or the even-numbered height setting image G32 is displayed on the display unit 50a at the start of the ending. After the odd-numbered high setting image G31 or the even-numbered high setting image G32 is cut-in-displayed and the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect or the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect is executed, the jackpot ending effect is performed.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 is set with the odd number setting suggestion effect flag or the even number setting suggestion effect flag, the odd number setting suggestion effect start indicating the effect content of the odd number setting suggestion effect at the opening effect start (S4314). A command or an even-numbered setting suggestion effect start command indicating the effect content of the even-numbered setting suggestion effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The set odd-numbered setting suggestion effect start command or even-numbered setting suggestion effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004).

Then, when the image control board 140 receives the odd number setting suggestion effect start command or the even number setting suggestion effect start command, the odd number setting image G33 or the even number setting image G34 is displayed immediately before the opening ends and the round game starts. The odd-numbered setting image G33 or the even-numbered setting image G34 is cut-in-displayed on the entire display unit 50a to execute the odd-numbered setting suggestion effect or the even-numbered setting suggestion effect, and then the round game effect is performed.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an odd number, if the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after input are the same odd number, the big hit is won. A setting value suggestion effect suggesting that an odd number of setting values is set is executed. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the fourth embodiment, when the set value is set to an even number, if the jackpot is won when the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after input are the same even numbers, an even number is obtained. A suggestion setting value effect suggesting that the set value is set is executed. In this way, since the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed based on the number of times after input that is related to the set value, the player can be made to pay attention to the number of times after input, and the game entertainment is improved. ..

In addition, when the last three digits, which occur relatively infrequently, are the same number, the set value effect with a narrower range of set values is executed, so the set value effect can be sharpened, and the game can be played. The interest will improve.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
The setting value effect in the fourth embodiment is executed by using the odd-numbered high setting image G31, the even-numbered high setting image G32, the even-numbered setting image G33, and the even-numbered setting image G34, but the design of the image is not limited to this and is appropriately used. You may set it. The number high setting image G31, the even high setting image G32, the odd number setting image G33, and the even number setting image G34 are collectively referred to as "setting value suggestion images G31 to G34".

Further, the set value effect is performed, for example, by displaying the set value suggestion images G31 to G34 in a cut-in manner on the entire display unit 50a, but the display form is not limited to this and may be appropriately set. .. For example, the set value effect may be executed by displaying an object image that is not the entire display unit 50a on the display unit 50a. Further, the set value effect may be executed using specific elements of the opening background image G200, the round background image G201, and the ending background image G202, for example, the type, color, size, and shape of the character. Further, the set value effect may be executed by using other effect devices such as the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the panel movable device 55 in place of the image display device 50 or in addition to the image display device 50. .. Furthermore, the production contents of the four set value effects may all be the same. In this case, since only the number of times after input is a clue to specify the set value suggested by the set value effect, the game entertainment is improved.

Further, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is performed in the jackpot game, and more specifically, the odd-numbered high setting suggestion effect and the even-numbered high setting suggestion effect are executed between the round effect and the jackpot ending effect, and the odd number setting suggestion effect is performed. , And the even-numbered setting suggestion effect is executed between the jackpot opening effect and the round effect, but the execution time is not limited to these and may be appropriately executed. Further, the execution times of the four set value effects may be set to the same time or different times. Alternatively, a plurality of times when the set value effect can be executed may be set, and the execution time may be determined by a predetermined lottery.

Further, the set value effect of the fourth embodiment is executed in the jackpot game related to the jackpot when the jackpot is won a specific number of times after input, but it is executed in the special figure variable display related to the jackpot. May be. For example, the set value effect may be executed at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the jackpot, when the reach is established, when the SP reach develops, or at a specific timing of the special figure variation effect. ..

In addition, although the winning of the jackpot is included in the conditions for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment, instead of winning the jackpot, SP reach or a specific SP reach with a relatively high expectation of a jackpot, etc. , The execution of a specific effect may be a condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment. In this case, the set value effect may be executed at a specific timing of the special figure variation effect in which the specific effect is executed.

Further, the condition that the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after input is the same number is included in the condition for executing the set value effect of the fourth embodiment, but the condition is not limited to this. , May be set appropriately. For example, the execution condition of the set value effect may be that the value obtained by adding each of the number of times after input is an odd number or an even number. Then, for example, when the set value is an odd number, if the jackpot is won when the value obtained by adding each of the number of times after input is an odd number, the set value effect suggesting that the set value is an odd number is executed and set. When the value is an even number, if the jackpot is won when the value obtained by adding each place of the number of times after input is an even number, the set value effect suggesting that the set value is an even number may be executed.

Further, the condition of the number of times after input for executing the set value effect may be either the last two digits or the last three digits of the number of times after input. Further, if the condition of the number of times after input for executing the set value effect is the last four digits or the last five digits of the number of times after input, the effect of notifying the set value may be performed. .. Further, the first two digits or the first three digits of the number of times after input may be used as a condition for the number of times after input for executing the set value effect.

The types of the set value effect are an odd number setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is 1, 3, or 5, an odd number high setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is 3 or 5, and a set value. Is an even number setting suggestion effect suggesting that is 2, 4, or 6, and an even number setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is 4, or 6, but the setting is not limited to this and is appropriately set. Is also good. For example, only some of these set value effect types may be feasible. Further, for example, an odd low setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is 1 or 3 and an even low setting suggestion effect suggesting that the set value is 2 or 4 can be executed. Is also good.

Further, in the set value effect execution determination process, if it is determined in step S5105 that the set value is not 3 or 5, the process proceeds to step S5112 to execute the odd number setting suggestion effect. Further, if it is determined in step S5107 that the set value is not 4 or 6, the process proceeds to step S5114, and the even number setting suggestion effect is executed. However, if it is determined in step S5105 that the set value is not 3 or 5, or if it is determined in step S5107 that the set value is not 4 or 6, the set value effect determination process is completed, and the odd number setting suggestion effect or even number setting is performed. You may not execute the suggestion effect.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the set value effect is executed based on the number of times the variable display of the special figure is executed after the power is turned on, but the effect related to the set value is performed based on the number of times the jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on. You may do it. Alternatively, the effect related to the set value may be executed based on the number of times a specific jackpot game is executed after the power is turned on. As the specific jackpot game here, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high-probability high-base game state after the jackpot game, a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high-probability state after the jackpot game, and a jackpot game in which the game is controlled in a high-probability state after the jackpot game. After the jackpot game, the jackpot game may be set in which the game is controlled in a short time state.

In this case, the execution timing of the effect related to the set value can be set appropriately, but in the jackpot game, the effect related to the set value may be executed, or the effect related to the set value may be executed in the subsequent probabilistic mode or time saving mode. Is also good. Alternatively, the effect related to the set value may be executed in the first demo effect after that. Further, in the special figure variation effect before the jackpot game is performed, the effect related to the set value may be executed.

In general, the number of times the jackpot game is executed is much smaller than the number of times the variable display of the special figure is executed. Therefore, as an effect related to the set value, the number of times the jackpot game or a specific jackpot game is executed is two digits or more. If the last two digits are the same number, a set value effect suggesting a set value that has a one-to-one correspondence with the set value as in the first embodiment may be executed. Alternatively, if the setting value is 1 to 3, a low setting suggestion effect suggesting that the setting value is relatively low is executed, and if the setting value is 4 to 6, the setting value is relatively low. It is also possible to execute the suggestion high setting suggestion effect.

Further, as an execution condition of the effect related to the set value, it may be set that the number of times the big hit game or the specific big hit game is executed after the power is turned on is a specific number of times such as 10 times or 20 times. Further, as an execution condition of the effect related to the set value, the so-called "number of consecutive chans" may be set to a specific number of times such as 10 times and 20 times. Further, the last two digits of the so-called "number of consecutive chans" may be set to be the same number. In addition, the number of consecutive chans is the number of times that the big hit game is continuously executed without being in the normal game state after the big hit game is executed, and includes so-called "pull back". However, it is possible not to include the pullback in the number of consecutive chans.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can execute the set value effect suggesting the set value by using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the normal variation. In the fifth embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the fifth embodiment, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed using the same effect symbol G10 as in the basic embodiment. However, regarding the stop display of the normal fluctuation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect and the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect. It differs from the basic embodiment in that there is a stop display.

First, an example of the stop symbol pattern determination process including the process of determining whether or not to execute the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG.

In the stop symbol pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5201 whether or not the special figure variation pattern indicated by the stored special figure variation start command is a normal variation. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5206 if it is not normal fluctuation, and in step S5202 if it is normal fluctuation, the value indicated by the random number counter for setting value effect execution determination is acquired as a random number for setting value effect execution determination, and the step. In S5203, the set value effect execution determination is performed based on the acquired random number for the set value effect execution determination. The set value effect execution determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

The set value effect execution determination is executed using the set value effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 65, the set value effect execution determination table includes a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure fluctuation pattern is normally A loss variation, and when the special figure variation pattern is normal B loss variation. There is a set value effect execution determination table used and a set value effect execution determination table used when the special figure fluctuation pattern is normally C loss fluctuation. That is, a plurality of set value effect execution determination tables are provided in association with the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the normal fluctuation. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value effect execution determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern at the time of the set value effect execution determination.

In each set value effect execution judgment table, the value of the random number for setting value effect execution judgment (set value effect execution judgment value) is set depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed so as to be the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. It is sorted. The set value effect execution determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired set value effect execution determination random number with the selected set value effect execution determination table in the set value effect execution determination table, and determines whether or not the set value effect execution can be executed. Then, in step S5204, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the set value effect as a result of the set value effect execution determination. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5205 when it is determined to execute the set value effect, and proceeds to step S5206 when it is determined not to execute the set value effect.

In step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table for displaying the stop display of the reachless effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect. Further, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a normal stop symbol pattern determination table for displaying the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the set value effect stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the set value. Specifically, the stop symbol pattern determination table for setting value production includes a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is "1", a stop symbol pattern determination table used when the setting value is "2", and a setting. The stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the value is "3", the stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the set value is "4", the stop symbol pattern judgment table used when the set value is "5", and the set value. There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used at the time of "6". Therefore, in step S5205, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one set value symbol pattern determination table associated with the set value.

In the stop symbol pattern determination table for each set value effect, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is distributed to the stop symbol pattern so as to have the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. There is.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 67 to 68, the normal stop symbol pattern determination table is associated with the stop symbol and the special symbol variation pattern. Specifically, in the normal stop symbol determination table, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the stop special symbol is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, and the jackpot. The stop symbol pattern determination table used when the symbol E or the jackpot symbol F is used, the stop symbol pattern determination table used when the special symbol variation pattern is lost with reach, and when the special symbol variation pattern is lost without reach. There is a stop symbol pattern determination table used. Therefore, in step S5206, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the stop symbol indicated by the symbol designation command or the normal stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command.

In each normal stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination value) is assigned to the stop symbol pattern so as to have the selectivity (%) shown in FIGS. 67 to 68. ing.

The effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as the stop symbol pattern determination random number in step S5207, and obtains the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number in step S5205 or step S5208. The stop symbol pattern determination for determining the stop symbol pattern is performed by collating with the stop symbol pattern determination table selected in step S5206. The stop symbol pattern determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the stop symbol pattern data representing the determined stop symbol pattern in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in step S5209, and in step S5210, the stop symbol pattern command representing the determined stop symbol pattern. Is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the stop symbol pattern determination process is completed.

When the effect symbol command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect symbol from the image ROM 142. G10 is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 displays the stop of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 with the stop symbol pattern indicated by the stop symbol pattern command, and also displays the stop of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Here, the set value effect using the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be described. As shown in FIG. 66, six types of stop symbol patterns, stop symbol patterns 61 to stop symbol patterns 66, are set for the set value effect. The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by these six stop symbol patterns also serves as the set value effect.

The stop symbol pattern 61 is composed of 1 (blue), 3 (red), and 5 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 61 are odd numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 61 suggests that the set values are odd numbers.

The stop symbol pattern 62 is composed of 2 (blue), 4 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 62 are even numbers, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 62 suggests that the set value is an even number.

The stop symbol pattern 63 is composed of 1 (blue), 2 (blue), and 3 (red) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 63 represent relatively low set values among the set values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 63 is It suggests that the setting value is low.

The stop symbol pattern 64 is composed of 4 (blue), 5 (blue), and 6 (blue) stop symbols. Since all the numbers included in the effect symbols G10 constituting the stop symbol pattern 64 represent relatively high set values among the set values, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 64 is It suggests that it is a high setting value.

The stop symbol pattern 65 is composed of 6 (blue), 5 (blue), and 1 (blue) stop symbols. The numbers included in the production symbol G10 that composes the stop symbol pattern 65 are puns that mean "massive", such as "mu (6) go (5) i (1)" when read from the left. , The stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 65 suggests that the set value "1" is the most disadvantageous to the player.

The stop symbol pattern 66 is composed of 3 (blue), 1 (blue), and 5 (blue) stop effect symbols. When read from the left, the numbers included in the production symbol G10 that constitutes the stop symbol pattern 66 are puns that mean "the highest degree", such as "sa (3) i (1) ko (5)". Therefore, it is suggested that the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 performed by the stop symbol pattern 66 is the set value "6" which is most advantageous to the player.

When the set value is "1", the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 60%, the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 65 is selected with a probability of 5%. When the set value is "2", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a 55% probability, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a 45% probability. When the set value is "3", the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 45%, and the stop symbol pattern 63 is selected with a probability of 55%. In the case of the set value "4", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 40%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 60%. When the set value is "5", the stop symbol pattern 61 is selected with a probability of 35%, and the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 65%. In the case of the set value "6", the stop symbol pattern 62 is selected with a probability of 25%, the stop symbol pattern 64 is selected with a probability of 70%, and the stop symbol pattern 66 is selected with a probability of 5%.

It should be noted that the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal fluctuation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal variation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect, and the stop symbol pattern. Is not duplicated. In the following, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal fluctuation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serves as the set value effect is referred to as a “specific stop symbol pattern”. Further, the stop symbol pattern related to the stop display of the normal fluctuation effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that also serve as the set value effect is referred to as a "non-specific stop symbol pattern".

As described above, in the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 without reach, the set value effect is executed by the display contents of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, specifically, the numerical part included in the effect symbol G10. By paying attention to the stop display of the reachless loss production symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are the least interesting to the player, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game and improve the game entertainment.

Further, for the set value "2" to the set value "5", the stop symbol pattern 65 and the stop symbol pattern 66 for the set value "1" and the set value "6" directly suggest the set value. Although the symbol pattern is not set, the set value can be estimated by the combination of the stop symbol patterns that appear. Since the set value is also suggested by the combination of the stop symbol patterns that appear in this way, the game entertainment is further improved.

Further, for the stop symbol pattern 61, the selection rate is higher in the order of set value "1"> set value "3"> set value "5". Further, for the stop symbol pattern 62, the selection rate is higher in the order of set value "2"> set value "4"> set value "6". Further, for the stop symbol pattern 63, the selection rate is higher in the order of set value "3"> set value "2"> set value "1". Further, for the stop symbol pattern 64, the selection rate is higher in the order of set value "6"> set value "5"> set value "4". In this way, a predetermined stop symbol pattern can appear with a plurality of set values, and the selection rate differs depending on the set value. Therefore, the set value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of the stop symbol pattern. Therefore, the hobby of the game is improved.

(Example of modification of the fifth embodiment)
The stop effect symbol constituting the specific stop symbol pattern is not limited to the stop effect symbol shown in FIG. 66, and may be appropriately set. Further, in addition to the loss without reach, the set value effect may be executed by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the loss with reach and the jackpot. Further, the set value effect is performed when it is determined by the set value effect determination that the set value effect is to be executed, but the execution condition of the set value effect is not limited to this, and may be appropriately set. For example, after the SP reach loss change, the execution condition of the set value effect is that the special figure change effect of the loss without reach is performed in a specific period such as while the special figure change effect is executed a predetermined number of times, for example, 10 times. May be.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the sixth embodiment, when the set value is high, the effect content that does not appear when the set value is low is produced. As an example, when the set value is high, a big hit may be made with the effect content that does not become a big hit when the set value is low. In the sixth embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

As described above, for example, when the content of the SP reach is composed of a confrontation scene between a baseball pitcher and a batter, if the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the special figure fluctuation effect is the SP loss fluctuation, the SP reach proceeds. After reaching the victory / defeat turning point, the enemy character hits a home run and is defeated in the confrontation, and the main character is disappointed on the mound. (FIG. 26 (A-2), FIG. 26 (B-2), FIG. 26 (C-2)). Then, if there is a special figure hold, the next special figure variation effect is immediately executed.

Here, in the sixth embodiment, when the set value is 5 or 6, when the winning / losing turning point is reached in the SP reach related to the jackpot (FIG. 69 (A)), the enemy character hits a home run and confronts. (Fig. 69 (B)), and after the loss notification effect that the main character is disappointed on the mound is performed (Fig. 69 (C)), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 that show the big hit as they are. ~ KZ3 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 69 (D)), and the opening effect of the jackpot game is started (FIG. 69 (E)).

In this way, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, if the set value is other than 5 or 6, the set value becomes a big hit with the effect content that appears only in the special figure fluctuation effect related to the loss. It is suggested that it is set to 5 or 6. In the following, a production in which the content of the production is reversed and becomes a big hit is referred to as a “success / failure reversal production”. The success / failure reversal effect constitutes a set value effect that suggests that the set value is a relatively high set value 5 or a set value 6.

In the sixth embodiment, when a big hit is made when the set value is set to 5 or 6, the success / failure reversal effect is not always executed, but the success / failure reversal effect is executed with a predetermined probability. That is, when the set value is set to 5 or 6, there are a case where the success / failure reversal effect is executed and a big hit, and a case where the success / failure reversal effect is not executed and the big hit is performed as usual. In the sixth embodiment, the success / failure reversal effect may be performed by SP reach or L reach.

In the sixth embodiment, three types of SP reach, SP reach A to SP reach C, are set for the SP reach. Further, three types of L reach, L reach A to L reach C, are set for the L reach. Each SP reach and each L reach are set with production contents related to victory or defeat and success or failure. And basically, in the case of a jackpot, you will eventually win or succeed, while in the case of a loss, you will eventually lose or fail. Here, the reason why it is "basically" is that the success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 70, the production content of SP Reach A is a confrontation between the main character who is a pitcher and the batter A of the enemy team XX. The content of the production of SP Reach B is a confrontation between the main character who is a pitcher and the batter B of the enemy team △△. The content of the production of SP Reach C is a confrontation between the main character who is a pitcher and the batter C of the enemy team XX.

Then, in the normal SP reach A in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out the batter A and wins the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out the batter B and wins the confrontation. Further, in the SP reach C in the case of the SP jackpot fluctuation, the main character finally strikes out the batter C and wins the confrontation.

On the other hand, in the normal SP reach A in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character is finally hit by a batter A with a home run and loses the confrontation. Similarly, in the normal SP reach B in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character is finally hit by a batter B with a home run and loses the confrontation. In SP reach C in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the main character finally hits a home run by batter C and wins the confrontation. Here, the reason why the "normal" SP reach A to SP reach C are set is that the success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

In addition, the production content of L Reach A is a special training for learning new skills of the main character. The production content of L Reach B is a confession to a favorite woman of the main character. The content of L Reach C is a candidacy for the student president.

Then, in the normal L reach A in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the acquisition of a new technique is successful. Similarly, in the normal L reach B in the case of SP jackpot fluctuation, the confession finally succeeds. In L Reach C when the SP jackpot fluctuates, the student president will be elected.

On the other hand, in the normal L reach A in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the acquisition of a new technique fails. Similarly, in the normal L reach B in the case of SP loss fluctuation, the confession finally fails. In the case of SP loss fluctuation, L reach C will be rejected as the student council president. Here, the reason why the "normal" L reach A to L reach C are used is that the success / failure reversal effect may be performed.

In this way, the SP reach and L reach of the jackpot are the production contents that finally win or succeed. On the other hand, the SP reach and L reach of the loss are the production contents that are finally defeated or fail. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the case of a big hit, the big hit is suddenly and unexpectedly notified by the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big hit after the final defeat or failure.

Specifically, in the case of SP Reach A, in the confrontation between the main character and batter A, the main character is finally hit by a home run, and after the main character is defeated in the confrontation and is disappointed, a production pattern showing a big hit. The stop display of EZ1 to EZ3 is performed (see FIG. 69). Similarly, in SP Reach B, in the confrontation between the main character and batter B, after a home run is finally hit by batter B and the main character is defeated in the confrontation and disappointed, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing a big hit. A stop display is displayed. In SP Reach C, in the confrontation between the hero character and the batter C, after the hero character was finally hit by a home run and the hero character was defeated in the confrontation and was disappointed, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the big hit was displayed. Will be done.

In addition, in L Reach A, after the hero character fails in the special training and is disappointed because he cannot finally learn the new technique, the stop display of the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the big hit is performed. .. Similarly, in the case of L Reach B, when a confession to a favorite female is made, the main character fails to confess and is disappointed, and then the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that show a big hit are stopped. The display is done. In L Reach C, in the student council president's election, after the student council president is finally defeated and the main character fails in the election and is discouraged, the production symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit are stopped and displayed.

Here, the probabilities that SP reach A to SP reach C and L reach A to L reach C are selected (“selectivity” in FIG. 70) are set as shown in FIG. 70. The value of the random number for determining the special figure variation pattern (special figure variation pattern determination value) is appropriately distributed to various effects so as to have the selection rate shown in FIG. 70.

In the case of a big hit, the selection rate is higher in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the selection rate is higher in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C.

In the case of a big hit, the selection rate is higher in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C. On the other hand, in the case of loss, the selection rate is higher in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A. Therefore, there is a high possibility that a big hit will occur in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C.

Next, an example of the process of determining whether or not to execute the success / failure reversal effect will be described with reference to FIG. 71. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as a success / failure reversal effect determination process. As the success / failure reversal effect determination process, for example, in the process shown in FIG. 71, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the special figure variation effect pattern command representing the special figure variation effect pattern in the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306. It can be done after setting in the predetermined area of.

In the effect reversal effect determination process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines in step S5301 whether or not the special figure variation pattern indicated by the stored special figure variation start command is SP jackpot variation or L jackpot variation, that is, from now on. It is determined whether or not to execute the SP reach effect of the jackpot or the L reach effect of the jackpot. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation pattern is not SP jackpot fluctuation or L jackpot fluctuation, the success / failure reversal effect determination process is completed and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process, and the special figure variation pattern changes to SP jackpot. , Or, if it is determined that the L jackpot fluctuation, the process proceeds to step S5302.

In step S5302, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag and determines whether or not the set value is set to "5" or "6". When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value is not set to "5" or "6", the effect reversal effect determination process is completed and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process, and the set value is "5". , Or if it is determined that it is set to "6", the process proceeds to step S5303.

In step S5303, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the success / failure reversal effect determination table. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is a data table used when performing a success / failure reversal effect determination to determine whether or not to execute the success / failure reversal effect. As shown in FIG. 72, the success / failure reversal effect determination table is first associated with the set value. Further, the success / failure reversal effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the type of effect, specifically, the type of SP reach or the type of L reach.

Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value and the type of effect by referring to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 and the special figure variation effect pattern data, and confirms the set value and the type of effect, and the set value and the type of effect. Select the success / failure reversal effect execution judgment table associated with.

In each success / failure reversal effect execution determination table, a random number value for success / failure reversal effect determination (success / failure reversal effect determination value) is assigned to whether or not the success / failure reversal effect can be executed so as to be the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 72. ing. The success / failure reversal effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the success / failure reversal effect determination random number counter as the success / failure reversal effect determination random number in step S5304, and the acquired success / failure reversal effect determination random number in step S5305. The success / failure reversal effect determination is performed by collating with the success / failure reversal effect determination table selected in S5303. The success / failure reversal effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

Subsequently, in step S5306, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the success / failure reversal effect as a result of the success / failure reversal effect determination. If it is determined that the success / failure reversal effect is not executed, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the success / failure reversal effect determination process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. The success / failure reversal effect command indicating the execution of is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, the success / failure reversal effect execution determination process is completed, and the process returns to the special figure variation effect start process.

When the success / failure reversal effect command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 performs L reach or SP reach. At that time, the success / failure reversal effect is executed by displaying the image related to the L reach and SP reach of the effect content that would normally be lost on the display unit 50a, and finally the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit. Display the stop.

According to the success / failure reversal effect determination table according to the sixth embodiment, the selection rate for the execution of the success / failure reversal effect is higher in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5" for each type of effect. It is set high. Therefore, when the success / failure reversal effect is executed, the set value “6” can be expected even more than the set value “5”. Further, for each set value, there is a high possibility that the success / failure reversal effect is executed in the order of SP reach C> SP reach B> SP reach A. Similarly, there is a high possibility that the success / failure reversal effect will be executed in the order of L reach C> L reach B> L reach A. These orders match the order of probabilities selected in the case of a loss for the same reach effect. That is, the tendency of the selection rate for the execution of the success / failure reversal effect and the tendency of the expectation of loss for the same reach effect are in agreement. Therefore, while suppressing the loss of the original function of the reach effect as much as possible, the success / failure reversal effect improves the game entertainment.

As described above, in the sixth embodiment, the jackpot is produced with a theory different from the normal theory by executing the success / failure reversal effect, so that the player can be surprised and experience the freshness. Furthermore, since the set value is suggested in that, the game entertainment is improved. Further, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed when "5" and "6", which are relatively high set values, are set, it is possible to raise the mood of the player. Further, since the success / failure reversal effect is executed at the time of a big hit, it is possible to prevent the player's motivation to play from diminishing.

(Example of modification of the sixth embodiment)
The success / failure reversal effect may be executed by SP reach or L reach, but the type of effect in which the success / failure reversal effect is executed is not limited and may be appropriately set. The success / failure reversal effect may be executed only in SP reach. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed only in the L reach. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed by some types of SP reach or L reach such as SP reach A or L reach A. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed by an effect other than SP reach or L reach.

Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed when the set value is "5" or "6", but the set value at which the success / failure reversal effect is executed may be appropriately set without being limited. For example, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed only with one specific set value such as the set value “6”. Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be executed at the time of the highest setting value and the lowest setting value such as the setting values "6" and "1".

Further, the specific effect content of the success / failure reversal effect is not limited to the effect content shown in FIG. 69, and may be appropriately set. In addition, instead of executing an effect that suggests a set value with a story-like effect as in the above-mentioned success / failure reversal effect, for example, a light emitting mode that appears only when the set value is "5" or "6". The frame lamp 53 may be made to emit light. Similarly, the panel movable device 55 may be operated in an operation mode that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6”. Further, the speaker 52 may output the sound that appears only when the set value is “5” or “6”. These are not limited to the special figure fluctuation production, but may be performed by a jackpot game production or a demonstration production.

Furthermore, the success / failure reversal effect is performed by the special figure variation effect, and as the success / failure reversal effect, the jackpot game is performed after the effect that basically has a function of suggesting a loss such as defeat or failure is performed. , The application scene of the success / failure reversal effect is not limited to this. For example, a so-called "rank-up bonus" round game is performed, and in this round game, the round game continues if the production content is success or victory at the turning point of whether or not the round game continues. It is assumed that the round game ends if the production content is failure or defeat. When the set value "5" or "6" is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and although the player fails or loses, the round game may be continued.

In addition, in the jackpot game, a high probability state is set after the jackpot game if it is a production content that finally succeeds or wins, and a high probability state is set after the jackpot game if it is a production content that finally fails or loses. Not done. Then, when the set value "5" or "6" is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the effect is that the player finally fails or loses. May be able to be set.

Furthermore, there are multiple types of high-probability specified times when a high-probability state is set in the same effect mode after a big hit game, and a certain high-probability rule is set in a situation where the special figure variable display continues to be executed in the high-probability state. It is assumed that when the special figure variable display related to the number of times is executed, the effect of whether or not the high-probability state continues is executed as a turning point of whether or not the high-probability state continues. This production is assumed to be a predetermined confrontation or mission. And basically, if the high probability state continues, you win the confrontation or succeed in the mission. On the other hand, if the high probability state does not continue, you will be defeated in the confrontation or you will fail in the mission. When the set value "5" or "6" is set, the success / failure reversal effect is executed in this scene, and the player loses in the confrontation or fails in the mission, but the high probability state can be continued. You may do so.

Further, the success / failure reversal effect may be performed by using the loss variation. For example, normally, you lose the confrontation and lose, but by winning the confrontation and performing a success / failure reversal effect, it is suggested that the set value is "5" or "6". Is also good. In this case, it can be seen that the set value is high even though the player has lost the game, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play. Further, in the success / failure reversal determination, the tendency of the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is executed may be appropriately set. For example, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is to be executed may be set to be the same for each type of effect in the case of the set value "5" and the case of the set value "6". Further, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is to be executed may be set to a constant value regardless of the set value and the type of effect. Further, for each set value, the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect is executed increases in the order of SP reach A> SP reach B> SP reach C and in the order of L reach A> L reach B> L reach C. It may be set as follows. That is, the tendency of the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the type of reach effect and the tendency of the probability of determining that the success / failure reversal effect may be executed may match.

<7th Embodiment>
Next, a seventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the seventh embodiment, when the number of times the special figure variable display continues to be executed without winning the jackpot reaches a predetermined number of times, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed. A plurality of these predetermined times are set, and as the predetermined number of times increases, it becomes easier to determine the set value. In the following, the number of times that the special figure variable display continues to be executed without winning the jackpot is referred to as "the number of addictions". Further, in the seventh embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, various effect modes are set, and in the display unit 50a, various background images are displayed according to the effect mode. For example, when the normal effect mode is set, any one of the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background image G113 is displayed on the display unit 50a.

In the seventh embodiment, when the normal effect mode is set, the set value suggestion background image G140 may be displayed in addition to the normal background images G111 to G113. The fact that the set value suggestion background image G140 is displayed is also referred to as "staying in the set value suggestion zone". The set value suggestion background image G140 is displayed when the number of addictions reaches a predetermined number of times. That is, when the number of addictions reaches a predetermined number of times, the set value suggestion zone is entered. By displaying the set value suggestion background image G140, in other words, by entering and staying in the set value suggestion zone, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is suggested. In the following, displaying the set value suggestion background image G140 and staying in the set value suggestion zone are also referred to as execution of the set value effect.

Specifically, when the number of addictions reaches 500, 750, and 1000, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, or the third normal background displayed at that time is reached. The image G113 is switched to the set value suggestion background image G140. The set value suggestion background image G140 is a background image dedicated to the set value effect, and is a first normal background image G111, a second normal background image G112, a third normal background image G113, and a probability variation background image G120. , And a background image for time saving, which is different from any background image such as G130.

The display of the set value suggestion background image G140 is continued until the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, or until the big hit is won before the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times. Will be executed. That is, if the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without winning the big hit, or if the big hit is won before the special figure variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, the set value suggestion zone is exited. The predetermined number of times is set to 1 to 6 times. In the following, this predetermined number of times is referred to as "continuation number of times".

The number of continuations is determined by the number of continuations determination for determining how many continuations are to be made. The effect control microcomputer 121 uses the continuation number determination table to determine the number of continuations. The continuation number determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

As shown in FIG. 73, the continuation number determination table is associated with the number of addictions. That is, the continuation count determination table used in the continuation count determination differs depending on the number of addictions. Further, the continuation count determination table associated with the addiction count is also associated with the set value. That is, the continuation count determination table used in the continuation count determination differs depending on the set value.

In this way, the continuation count determination table is associated with the number of addictions and the set value. Then, the selection rate of each continuation number (1 to 6) is set by the combination of the number of addictions and the set value.

According to the continuation number judgment table, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the continuation number is selected as 1 is the setting value "1"> the setting value "2"> the setting value "3"> the setting value "4". > Set value "5"> Set value "6" increases in this order. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, there is a high possibility that the set values are in this order.

In addition, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 6 is the setting value "6"> the setting value "5"> the setting value "4"> the setting value "3"> the setting value "2". "> The setting value increases in the order of" 1 ". That is, if the special figure variable display is performed 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, there is a high possibility that the set values are in this order.

Further, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 2 is the highest when the setting value is "2", and the highest when the setting value is "5" or the setting value is "6". Low. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, the possibility of the set value "2" is the highest, and the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set. Most unlikely.

Alternatively, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 4 is the highest when the setting value is "4", and the highest when the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". Low. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, the possibility of the set value "4" is the highest, and the set value "1" or the set value "2" is set. Most unlikely.

Further, when the number of addictions is 500, the probability that the number of continuations is selected as 5 is the highest when the setting value is "5", and the highest when the setting value is "1" or the setting value is "2". Low. That is, if the special figure variable display is performed 5 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, the possibility of the set value "5" is the highest, and the set value "1" or the set value "2" is set. Most unlikely.

When the number of addictions is 500 and the set value is "6", the selection rate for the number of continuations "1" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is "6". Similarly, when the number of addictions is 500 and the set value is "1", the selection rate for the number of continuations "6" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 500, there is no possibility that the set value is "1".

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is "3" to the set value "6", the selection rate for the number of continuations "1 time" or "2 times" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed once or twice in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 750 times, there is no possibility that the set value is "3" to the set value "6", and the set value " It means that either "1" or the set value "2" is set. However, if the number of continuations is one, it is more likely that the set value is "1", while if the number of continuations is two, it is more likely that the set value is "2". ..

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is "5" to the set value "6", the selection rate for the number of continuations "3 times" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed three times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 750, there is no possibility that the set value is "5" to the set value "6", and the set value is "1" to. It means that any of the set values "4" is set. However, in this case, the setting value "3" is most likely, and the setting value "1" is the least likely.

Further, when the number of addictions is 750, the selection rate for the number of continuations "4 times" is higher than 0 regardless of the set value "1" to the set value "6". Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed four times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 750, there is a possibility that any of the set value "1" to the set value "6" is set. become. However, in this case, the setting value "4" is most likely, and the setting value "1" is the least likely.

Further, when the number of addictions is 750 and the set value is "1" to the set value "2", the selection rate for the number of continuations "5" or "6" is 0%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed 5 or 6 times in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 750 times, there is no possibility that the set value is "1" to the set value "2", and the set value " It means that any one of "3" to the set value "6" is set. However, when the number of continuations is 5, there is a high possibility that the set value is "5", and the possibility that the set value is "3" is the lowest. On the other hand, when the number of continuations is 6, there is a high possibility that the set value is "6", and the possibility that the set value is "3" is the lowest.

In this way, when the number of addictions is 500 and 750, there is a possibility that there are multiple set values for one continuation number, and the selection rate differs depending on the set value, so the set value depends on the number of continuations. It will be suggested. On the other hand, when the number of addictions is 1000, only one set value is associated with one continuation number, so that the set value is notified according to the continuation number.

Specifically, when the number of addictions is 1000 and the set value "2" to the set value "6" are set, the selection rate for the number of continuations "1 time" is 0%, and the set value " When "1" is set, the selection rate for the number of continuations "1 time" is 100%. Therefore, if the special figure variable display is performed only once in the set value suggestion zone from the time when the number of addictions is 1000, there is no possibility that the set value is "2" to the set value "6", and the set value is "1". Will be set. Similarly, when the number of addictions is 1000 and the number of continuations of the set value suggestion zone is 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6, the set value is "2" and the set value is "3". -The set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6" are set.

In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the number of continuations based on the continuation number determination table, but the determination of the number of continuations is performed at the time of the stop display of the special figure, that is, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. be able to. Then, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the continuation number by the continuation number determination, the set value effect is started at the end of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the normal background images G111 to G113 displayed up to that point are started. Switch to the set value suggestion background image G140 from. After that, the set value effect is continuously executed until the special figure variable display is executed a continuous number of times without winning the jackpot. Then, when the variable display of the special figure for the number of continuations ends, the set value effect is ended, and the set value suggestion background image G140 is switched to the normal background image G111 to G113 immediately before the set value effect is executed.

Next, a specific example of the set value effect will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), it is assumed that the special figure variation effect for which the number of addictions is 500 is executed. At this time, the first normal background image G111 is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, it is assumed that the special map fluctuation pattern of the 500th special map variation display is a loss variation. Then, it is assumed that the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed as shown in FIG. 74 (B) in the special figure variation effect in which the number of addictions is 500.

Here, when the number of continuations is determined and the number of continuations is determined, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 ends, and the next special figure variation effect is started. At that time, the set value effect starts, and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the set value suggestion background image G140.

If the number of reserved special figures is "0" when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 having the 500th addiction count is completed, the next variable display of special figures and the variable effect of special figures are started. Instead, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is continuously executed, but the special symbol confirmation time has elapsed since the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 was started, that is, the special symbol is suspended. At the timing when the next special figure variation effect is started when is present, the set value effect is started, and the first normal background image G111 is switched to the set value suggestion background image G140.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 75A to 75C, the set value effect is executed until the special figure variable display of the set value effect continuation number is executed without winning the jackpot, and the set value effect is performed. When the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of the continuation number is performed, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the set value effect is completed and the set value suggestion background image G140 is the first before the execution of the set value effect. 1 Switch to the normal background image G111.

In FIGS. 74 to 75, the set value effect is exemplified when the number of addictions reaches 500 times, but the set value effect is similarly executed when the number of addictions reaches 750 times and 1000 times.

Next, in the seventh embodiment, an example of the set value effect processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 77. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 may perform the set value effect process shown in FIGS. 76 to 77 after the special figure variation stop process in step S4308 when it is determined in step S4307 that the special figure variation stop command has been received. can.

In the set value effect process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the normal effect mode is set as step S5401. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal effect mode is not set, the set value effect process is completed, and if it is determined that the normal effect mode is set, the process proceeds to step S5402.

In step S5402, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds "1" to the counter value of the addiction count counter that counts the addiction count. In this way, the counter value of the addiction count counter is added by "1" each time the special figure variation display ends in the normal effect mode. The addiction count counter is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. In addition, the addiction count counter is cleared as the jackpot game is executed.

Next, in step S5403, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the number of remaining set value effects, which will be described later, is 1 or more. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value effect remaining number of times is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S5416, and when it is determined that the set value effect remaining number of times is not 1 or more, that is, 0, the process proceeds to step S5404.

Next, in step S5404, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the addiction count counter and determines whether or not the addiction count is 500. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 500, it proceeds to step S5406, and if it determines that the number of addictions is 500, it proceeds to step S5405 and proceeds to a continuation number determination table for 500 addictions. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

In step S5406, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the addiction count counter and determines whether or not the addiction count is 750. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 750, it proceeds to step S5408, and if it determines that the number of addictions is 750, it proceeds to step S5407 and determines the number of continuations for 750 addictions. Is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

In step S5408, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the addiction count counter and determines whether or not the addiction count is 1000 times. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is not 1000, the set value effect process is completed, and when it is determined that the number of addictions is 1000, the process proceeds to step S5409, and the number of continuations for the number of addictions of 1000 is continued. The determination table is selected and the process proceeds to step S5410.

In step S5410, the effect control microcomputer 121 further confirms the set value flag from the continuation number determination table for the selected number of addictions of 500 times, 750 times, or 1000 times, and is associated with the set value. Select the continuation count judgment table.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the continuation number determination random number counter as the continuation number determination random number in step S5411, and selects the acquired continuation count determination random number in step S5412. The number of continuations is determined by collating with the table for determining the number of continuations.

In each continuation number determination table, the value of the continuation number determination random number (continuation number determination value) is assigned to the continuation number so as to be the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 73. Further, the random number counter for determining the number of continuations is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

In step S5413, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the continuation number, which is the result of the continuation number determination, in the set value effect remaining number counter, and in step S5414, the normal effect stage data indicating the current normal effect stage is converted into the effect RAM 124. In step S5415, a set value effect start command indicating the effect content of the set value effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the set value effect process is completed.

The counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter indicates the remaining number of times of the special figure variable display in which the set value effect can be executed. As will be described later, in the set value effect effect, as long as the set value effect remaining number counter is 1 or more, "1" is subtracted each time the set value effect effect process is performed. In the following, the remaining number of times of special figure variation display in which the set value effect can be performed is referred to as "set value effect remaining number of times".

Further, when the set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is subjected to the effect symbols EZ1 to 1. When the special figure confirmation time elapses after stopping EZ3, the current normal background images G111 to G113 are switched to the set value suggestion background image G140.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 subtracts "1" from the counter value of the set value effect remaining number counter in step S5416, and determines whether or not the set value effect remaining number is "0" in step S5417. do. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value effect remaining number is not "0", the set value effect process is completed as it is, and if it is determined that the set value effect remaining number is "0", the normal step S5418 is performed. Check the effect stage data, indicate the normal effect stage before the execution of the set value effect, and set the set value effect end command indicating to end the set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and set the set value effect. Finish the process.

When the set value effect end command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 causes the set value suggestion background image G140. Then, the normal background images G111 to G113 before the execution of the set value effect are switched to end the set value effect.

As described above, in the seventh embodiment, the set value effect that can suggest or notify the set value is executed based on the number of addictions, so that the game interest is improved and the game motivation cannot be won. You can get interested in the game even though it is declining. Further, as the number of addictions increases, the possible set values are narrowed down and it becomes easier to guess the set values, so that the effect of the set value effect is improved.

(Example of modification of the seventh embodiment)
In the seventh embodiment, the set value effect is executed by displaying the set value suggestion background image G140 on the display unit 50a. However, as an effect mode of the set value effect, the image type is set to the set value suggestion background image G140. It is not limited and may be set as appropriate. Further, as an effect mode of the set value effect, the set value effect may be executed by using another effect device such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, and a panel movable device 55 instead of the image or in addition to the image. ..

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the set value is suggested or notified according to the number of continuations of the set value effect, but the element for suggesting or notifying is not limited to the number of continuations and may be appropriately set. For example, a plurality of image types related to the set value effect may be set, and the set value may be suggested or notified according to the type of the image that appears when the number of addictions is a predetermined number of times.

Further, the number of times the set value effect is executed, the number of continuations of the set value effect, the selection rate of the number of continuations for each set value, and the like may be appropriately set.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the continuation number determination is executed at the start of the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the set value effect starts when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped. However, the execution timing of the continuation number determination and the start timing of the set value effect may be appropriately set. For example, after the continuation number determination is executed, the set value effect may be started when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are variablely displayed, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered. Further, the set value effect may be started from the middle of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 such as when the reach is established, and the set value suggestion zone may be entered.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the special figure variation display related to the number of addictions for executing the set value effect is counted only in the special figure variation display in the normal effect mode, but in the probabilistic effect mode and the time saving effect mode. The special figure fluctuation display at the time may also be counted.

<8th Embodiment>
Next, an eighth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eighth embodiment, when the setting value most advantageous to the player is set, that is, when the setting value having the highest jackpot probability is set, the set value is set in the jackpot game having the largest number of rounds. A set value effect suggesting that is set may be executed. In the eighth embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

As described in the basic embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is provided with various types of jackpot symbols. In the eighth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 78, six types of jackpot symbols, jackpot symbols D to jackpot symbols I, are provided as jackpot symbols according to the special figure 2.

As shown in FIG. 79, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is 10, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is 10, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is 10. The number is 8 times, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G is 6, the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H is 4, and the number of rounds of the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol I is. 6 times.

In the following, the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D is the "fourth jackpot game", the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol E is the "fifth jackpot game", and the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is the "sixth jackpot game". The jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol G is the "7th jackpot game", the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol H is the "8th jackpot game", and the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol I is the "9th jackpot game".

Further, in the round games of the 4th big hit game to the 9th big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening 14 is set to 29.5 seconds, and the closing time is set to 2.0 seconds. Further, as shown in FIG. 80, the gaming state set after the 4th jackpot game to the 8th jackpot game is a high-probability high-base gaming state, and the high-probability specified number of times is 160 times and the time-saving specified number of times is 160 times. It is set. On the other hand, the game state set after the ninth big hit game is a low-probability high-base game state, and the time saving specified number of times is set to 100 times.

Then, in the 4th big hit game, it is suggested that the number of rounds is 10, and the big hit game production dedicated to the 5th big hit game is executed. On the other hand, in the 5th big hit game to the 9th big hit game, a big hit game effect called a so-called "rank up bonus" is executed. In the rank-up bonus, for example, the number of round games, in other words, the maximum number of prize balls that a player can obtain is not known before the start of the jackpot game, and the round game continues to be the maximum during the jackpot game. By directing whether or not the number of prize balls is ranked up (increased), it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

The number of rounds of the 5th jackpot game to the 9th jackpot game is 4, 6, 8 and 10 times, and at the end of the 4th round, it is directed whether or not the round game will continue after the 4th round. Will be. Then, in the case of the 5th jackpot game to the 7th jackpot game and the 9th jackpot game, at the end of the 6th round, a production is performed to determine whether or not the round game will continue after the 6th round. In the case of the 5th big hit game to the 6th round game, at the end of the 8th round, it is directed whether or not the round game will continue after the 8th round.

For example, when the round game of the 5th big hit game to the 9th big hit game starts, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), a video in which a favorite singer of the main character sings a song A as a round background image G201 on the display unit 50a. Is displayed, and song A is played from the speaker 52. Then, at the end of the 4th round, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the singer finishes singing the song A and immerses himself in the lingering sound. The scene immersed in this lingering sound constitutes the production of whether or not the round game will continue.

If it is the 8th big hit game, the round game ends here. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 81 (C), after a while, the ending is entered and as shown in FIG. 81 (D). After suggesting that the singer bowed and the round game was completed, the above-mentioned ending image G5 and total prize ball number image G6 are displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (E). On the other hand, in the case of the 5th jackpot game to the 7th jackpot game and the 9th jackpot game, the round game continues, so after a short time, the round 5 starts and as shown in FIG. 82 (A). Then, the singer begins to sing another song B.

Further, from the 5th round to the 6th round, the image of the singer singing the song B is played as in the case of the 1st to 4th rounds, and when the 6th round is completed, the singer is shown in FIG. 82 (B). Finishes singing song B and immerses himself in the lingering sound. Then, in the case of the 7th jackpot game and the 9th jackpot game, the round game ends here. Therefore, as in the case of the 8th jackpot game, after a short interval, as shown in FIG. 82 (C). The ending is done. On the other hand, in the case of the 5th big hit game to the 6th big hit game, the round game continues, so after a while, the round 7 is started and the singer again as shown in FIG. 82 (D). Start singing another song C.

Further, from the 7th round to the 8th round, the image of the singer singing the song C is similarly played, and when the 8th round is completed, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the singer finishes singing the song C and lingers. Soak. Then, in the case of the 6th big hit game, the round game ends here, so as in the case of the 8th big hit game, after a while, the ending is performed as shown in FIG. 83 (B). Will be. On the other hand, in the case of the 5th big hit game, the round game continues, so after a while, the round 9 is started, and as shown in FIG. 83 (C), the singer plays another song D. Start singing. After that, at the end of the 10th round, the singer finishes singing the song D, and after a while after being immersed in the lingering sound, as shown in FIG. 83 (D), as in the case of the 8th jackpot game or the like. The ending is executed.

In this way, in the 5th jackpot game to the 9th jackpot game, the singer may bow or start singing the song again after a while after the singer finishes singing the song and soaks in the lingering sound. Here, the scene where the singer finishes singing the song and immerses himself in the lingering sound constitutes a continuous branching effect of whether or not the round game continues. In addition, the scene of bowing constitutes a continuation failure effect that suggests that the round game does not continue. On the other hand, the scene where the singing starts again constitutes a continuous success production that suggests that the round game will continue.

In addition, the period from the singer's singing to the bowing, and the period from the singer's singing to the start of another song are the rounds. Specifically, it is the period of closure after the opening of the big winning opening 14 in the 4th, 6th, 8th, and 10th rounds. The time of this period is longer than the closing time after opening of the big winning opening 14 in the 1st to 3rd rounds, 5th round, 7th round, and 9th round.

Next, the blessing effect performed in one round of the fifth jackpot game will be described. The blessing production is a production that suggests that the number of rounds is the maximum in the rank-up bonus. There are three types of blessing production. The first is a normal blessing effect that can be executed at any set value. The second is a high setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 4 to 6 and suggests that the setting value is relatively high. The third is a maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect that can be executed when the setting value is 6 and suggests that it is the highest setting value.

Here, specific examples of the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, and the maximum set value suggestion blessing effect will be described. First, I will explain the normal blessing production. For example, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), in one round, a singer who likes the main character appears and starts singing song A.

Here, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the first effect button operation valid period as described in the basic embodiment occurs, and the first effect button operation accompanied by the first effect button operation promotion image G12 occurs. The promotion effect is executed. When the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation valid period, any of the blessing effects may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 84C, the normal blessing effect is composed of a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment. Specifically, the movable board 55k descends to the operating position in front view, the rotating member 55k1 rotates, and the normal effect image G13 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a.

Further, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include the movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but still another effect is also included. Specifically, FIG. 84 (D), the movable body 55k of the board is lowered to the operating position in front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Further, in addition to displaying the normal effect image G13 on the entire display unit 50a, a specific sound effect (for example, “Kyuinkyuin”) is output from the speaker 52 in a system different from that of the song A. It differs from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, "Kyuinkyuin") is output from the speaker 52.

Further, the highest set value suggestion blessing effect is also configured to include a movable body effect as described in the basic embodiment, but still another effect is also included. Specifically, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and the rotating member 55k1 rotates. Further, the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, and the specific sound effect (for example, "Kyuinkyuin") is output from the speaker 52 in a system different from that of the song A. It differs from the normal blessing effect in that a specific sound effect (for example, “Kyuinkyuin”) is output from the speaker 52 and the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Further, the special effect image G16 is displayed on the entire display unit 50a, which is different from the high setting value suggestion blessing effect.

If the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, and the maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect are not executed, the first effect button operation is performed even if the first effect button 40k is operated during the first effect button operation valid period. Only the promotion image G12 disappears, and the round background image G201 is displayed as it is.

In addition, the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, and the maximum set value suggestion blessing effect are performed for 5 seconds. When these effects are completed, the board movable body 55k returns to the standby state, the specific sound effect disappears, and the normal effect image G13 or the special effect image G16 returns to the round background image G201 in which the singer sings the song A.

In this way, the normal blessing effect, the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, and the highest setting value suggestion blessing effect may be executed, but whether or not to execute the blessing effect, and which blessing effect is executed. Is determined by the blessing effect determination that determines whether or not the blessing effect can be executed and the type of the blessing effect when the blessing effect is executed. The blessing effect determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 using the blessing effect determination table. The blessing effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123.

As shown in FIGS. 85 (A), 85 (B), 86 (A), and 86 (B), the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination differs depending on the set value. Further, the blessing effect determination table associated with the set value is associated with the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game during the consecutive chan. That is, the blessing effect determination table used in the blessing effect determination also differs depending on the number of times the fifth big hit game is executed during the consecutive chan.

In this way, the blessing effect determination table is associated with the set value and the number of executions of the fifth jackpot game during the consecutive chan. Then, the type of blessing effect to be executed and the selection rate of non-execution of the blessing effect are set by the combination of the set value and the number of times the fifth big hit game is executed during the consecutive chan.

For example, if the setting value is "6", it is possible to select the execution of the normal blessing effect, the execution of the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, the execution of the maximum set value suggestion reduction effect, and the non-execution of the blessing effect. Further, if the set value is "4" and the setting value is "5", it is possible to select the execution of the normal blessing effect, the execution of the high setting value suggestion blessing effect, and the non-execution of the blessing effect. Further, if the set value is "1" to the set value "3", it is possible to select whether to execute the normal blessing effect or not to execute the blessing effect.

In the case of the set value "4" to the set value "6", the selection rate for the execution of the high set value effect increases as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chan increases. Further, in the case of the set value "6", as the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chan increases, the selection rate for the execution of the maximum set value effect increases. Further, with respect to the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the same continuous chan, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate for the execution of the high set value effect.

Next, in the eighth embodiment, an example of the blessing effect processing performed by the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the blessing effect will be described with reference to FIG. 87. For example, the effect control microcomputer 121 can perform the blessing effect process shown in FIG. 87 after step S4203 in the 10 ms timer interrupt process in step S4012.

In the blessing effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 121 first determines, as step S5501, whether or not one round of the fifth big hit game is being executed. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that one round of the fifth big hit game has not been executed, the blessing effect process is finished, and when it is determined that one round of the fifth big hit game has been executed, the process proceeds to step S5502.

In step S5502, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the first effect button 40k has been operated during the first effect button operation valid period, which is currently the first effect button operation valid period. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the first effect button operation is not valid, or the first effect button operation is valid but the first effect button 40k is not operated, the blessing effect process ends. On the other hand, the effect control microcomputer 121 is in the first effect button operation valid period, and if it is determined that the first effect button 40k has been operated in the first effect button operation valid period, the process proceeds to step S5503.

In step S5503, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects a blessing effect determination table associated with the set value indicated by the set value flag and the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous channel.

Although not shown, the effect control microcomputer 121 is provided in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124 in the opening effect start process, for example, when an opening command indicating the jackpot symbol E related to the fifth jackpot game is received. Add "1" to the 5th jackpot game execution count counter. As a result, the effect control microcomputer 121 can count the number of times the fifth big hit game is executed during the continuous channel. Further, the fifth jackpot game execution count counter is cleared when the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state shifts to the low-probability low-base gaming state without going through the jackpot.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the blessing effect determination random number counter as the blessing effect determination random number in step S5504, and selects the blessing effect determination random number in step S5505. Blessing production judgment is performed by collating with the judgment table.

In each blessing effect determination table, the value of the random number for determining the blessing effect (blessing effect) is set to the execution of various blessing effects or the non-execution of the blessing effect so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIGS. 85 to 86 is obtained. Judgment value) is sorted. Further, the random number counter for determining the blessing effect is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

In step S5506, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the result of the blessing effect determination is the execution of any of the blessing effects. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the blessing effect is not executed, the blessing effect ends as it is, and if it is determined that any of the blessing effects is executed, the blessing effect indicating the type and effect content of the blessing effect is shown in step S5507. The start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the blessing effect process is completed. The effect control microcomputer 121 does not perform the blessing effect process once the fifth big hit game proceeds to step S5503.

As described above, in the eighth embodiment, in the jackpot game with the maximum number of rounds, the high setting value suggesting that the set value is relatively high by using the blessing effect suggesting that the number of rounds is the maximum. Since the suggestion blessing effect and the maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect suggesting that the set value is the highest are executed, the game entertainment can be improved and the player's motivation to play can be further increased. Further, as the number of times the fifth big hit game is executed during the continuous chan increases, the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect are likely to be executed, so that the player's motivation to play can be further increased.

(Example of modification of the eighth embodiment)
The specific effect content of the set value effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be appropriately set. Further, although the high setting value effect and the maximum set value effect were executed using the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55 were replaced. Or, in addition to the image display device 50, the speaker 52, and the panel movable device 55, other effect devices such as the frame lamp 53 may be used to perform the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect. Further, the type of the effect device to be used may be changed between the high set value effect and the maximum set value effect.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the blessing effect determination is performed based on the number of executions of the fifth big hit game in the continuous chan, but the number of consecutive chans including the number of executions of the big hit game other than the fifth big hit game is used. A blessing production judgment may be made based on this. Further, the blessing effect determination may be made based on the number of executions of the jackpot game having the maximum number of executions of the round game, not limited to the continuous chan.

Further, it may be possible to execute only one of the high setting value effect and the maximum set value effect. Further, the high set value effect can be executed with the set value "4" to the set value "6", but may be executed when the set value "5" to the set value "6". Further, in the case of the set value "1" to the set value "3" or the set value "1" to the set value "2", it is possible to execute a low set value effect suggesting that the set value is relatively low. You may be able to do it.

Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to the eighth embodiment, and may be appropriately set. For example, a blessing effect may be executed during a round game after the second round. In addition, a blessing effect may be performed at the opening. Further, in the special symbol variation effect, the blessing effect may be executed before the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed and after the notification that the jackpot is a big hit is performed. Further, the execution timing of the blessing effect is not limited to one, and may be set to a plurality. Further, the pattern of the blessing effect is not limited to one, and a plurality of patterns may be set.

<9th embodiment>
Next, a ninth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the ninth embodiment, the set value effect suggesting the set value is executed by using the display mode at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. In the ninth embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be mainly described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

First, a specific example of setting value production will be described. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 of a predetermined combination set in advance are displayed in the stopped state on the display unit 50a. For example, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), it is assumed that the combination of "left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, right effect symbol EZ3" is "3, 2, 4". Then, in this state, when the first special symbol variation display after the power is turned on is started, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started accordingly.

Here, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 can be appropriately set, but for example, as a normal display mode in which the set value effect is not performed, FIGS. 88 (B) to 88 (B) As shown in C), each effect symbol EZ1 to EZ3 in the stopped state can be moved downward as it is. Hereinafter, the display mode at the start of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 will be referred to as a “normal start mode”.

The order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start to change can be appropriately set. For example, it is possible to make the three effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start to fluctuate at the same time. Further, it is also possible to start the fluctuation in the order of the left effect symbol EZ1 → the right effect symbol EZ3 → the middle effect symbol EZ2.

Then, in the ninth embodiment, if the set value is the same as the set value set when the power supply voltage was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time and does not change, the first effect after the power is turned on. In the variable display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the normal start mode. Therefore, the fact that the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the normal start mode changes because the set value is the same as the set value set when the power supply voltage was previously applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. It suggests that it is not. In the following, the set value set when the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time is referred to as a “previous set value”.

On the other hand, if the set value is different from the previous set value, that is, if the set value has been changed since the last time the power supply voltage was turned on to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the first fluctuation display after the power is turned on. In, as shown in FIG. 89 (A), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are different from the normal start mode as shown in FIGS. 89 (B) to 89 (C) from the first stopped state after the power is turned on. The variable display is started in the first special start mode. Specifically, the stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward after repeating a small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the first variation display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the "first special start mode" at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. The fact that the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the first special start mode suggests that the set value has changed from the previous time.

Further, when the set value is higher than the previously set value, in the first variation display after the power is turned on, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are the first stop after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 90 (A). From the state, as shown in FIGS. 90 (B) to 90 (C), the variable display is started in the normal start mode and the second special start mode different from the first special start mode. Specifically, the stopped effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward after repeating small reciprocating motions in the left-right direction and the up-down direction at the start of the first variation display after the power is turned on. The small reciprocating motion in the left-right direction at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 constitutes the "second special start mode" at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, the fact that the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts in the second special start mode suggests that the set value is higher than the previous set value and has changed from the previous time.

It should be noted that the order in which the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 move downward when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 perform variable display in the first special start mode or the second special start mode can also be appropriately set.

In this way, the player can set a plurality of types of display modes at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on based on the current set value and the previous set value. You can roughly grasp the relationship between the current setting value and the previous setting value.

Further, although the details will be described later, when the set value is higher than the previous set value, the variable display is displayed when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode and in the second special start mode. There are times when it starts in the first special start mode without starting. The probability that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 start the variable display in the second special start mode increases as the current set value increases.

In the following, the normal start mode, the first special start mode, and the second special start mode are collectively referred to as "effect symbol change start mode". Further, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode is referred to as "first set value effect". Further, starting the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode is referred to as "second set value effect". The first set value effect and the second set value effect are collectively referred to as "set value effect".

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are not executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 smaller than the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Therefore, the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is started in the same manner regardless of whether or not the set value is the same as the previously set value.

Next, an example of the process of determining whether or not to execute the set value effect will be described with reference to FIG. 91. Hereinafter, this process is referred to as a set value effect determination process. As the set value effect determination process, for example, in the process shown in FIG. 91, the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a special figure variation effect pattern command representing the special figure variation effect pattern in the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306 to the effect RAM 124. It can be done after setting in the predetermined area of.

As a premise of the set value effect determination process, the game control microcomputer 101 previously applied the power supply voltage to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 based on the backup data in addition to the set value specification command in the game control main process. It is assumed that the previous setting value specification command indicating the setting value set at that time is transmitted to the effect control board 120. Then, when the effect control microcomputer 121 receives the previous set value specification command, the effect control microcomputer 121 inputs the previous set value data indicating the set value indicated by the previous set value specification command to the previous set value data area provided in the effect RAM 124. It shall be remembered.

In the effect control microcomputer 121, in the set value effect determination process, first, as step S5601, whether or not the special figure variation effect to be started from now on is the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, specifically, will be described later. It is determined whether or not the special figure variation effect executed flag is turned on.

When it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 121 is not the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect executed flag is turned on, the set value effect determination process is completed and the special figure variation effect is started. Return to processing. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that it is the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on, that is, the special figure variation effect executed flag is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S5602.

In step S5602, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the special figure variation effect executed flag indicating that the first special figure variation effect after the power is turned on is set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and proceeds to step S5603.

In step S5603, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag and the previous set value data, and determines whether or not the current set value is the same as the previous set value. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is the same as the previous set value, the effect control microcomputer 121 ends the set value effect determination process and returns to the special figure variation effect start process. On the other hand, if the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not the same as the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5604.

Next, in step S5604, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value flag and the previous set value data, and determines whether or not the current set value is higher than the previous set value. If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the current set value is not higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5610, while if it is determined that the current set value is higher than the previous set value, the process proceeds to step S5605.

In step S5605, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table. The second set value effect determination table is a data table used when performing a second set value effect determination for determining whether or not to execute the second set value effect. As shown in FIG. 92, the second set value effect determination table is associated with the set value. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the second set value effect determination table associated with the set value with reference to the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124.

In each second set value effect determination table, the value of the second set value effect determination random number (second set value) is set depending on whether or not the second set value effect is executed so that the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 92 is obtained. Production judgment value) is distributed. As shown in FIG. 92, the higher the set value, the higher the probability that it is determined that the second set value effect is executed. The second set value effect determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123. Further, when the set value is "1", it cannot be higher than the previous set value, so that the selection rate for the execution of the second set value effect is 0%.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the second set value effect determination random number counter as the second set value effect determination random number in step S5606, and the acquired second set value effect in step S5607. The second set value effect determination is performed by collating the random number for determination with the second set value effect determination table selected in step S5605. The second set value effect determination random number counter is provided in the effect RAM 124, and is appropriately updated by the random number seed update process in step S4003.

Subsequently, in step S5608, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the second set value effect as a result of the second set value effect determination. The effect control microcomputer 121 proceeds to step S5610 when it is determined not to execute the second set value effect, while it proceeds to step S5609 when it is determined to execute the second set value effect.

In step S5609, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the second set value effect start command indicating the effect content of the second set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, finishes the set value effect determination process, and is a special figure. Return to the variable production start process. On the other hand, in step S5610, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the first set value effect start command indicating the effect content of the first set value effect in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and finishes the set value effect determination process. Return to the special figure fluctuation production start process.

When the second set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is turned on. The second set value effect is executed at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the second special start mode.

Further, when the first set value effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is turned on. The first set value effect is executed at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 to be performed later. Specifically, the image CPU 141 starts the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in the first special start mode.

If the set value and the previous set value are the same, the first set value effect command or the second set value effect command is not transmitted to the image control board 140. Therefore, the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 starts the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on in the normal start mode.

In this way, the set value effect may be executed, so that the player can recognize what kind of state the current set value is with respect to the previous set value. That is, it can be inferred whether or not the set value has been changed since the power supply voltage was applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 last time. Basically, the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is cut off at the end of business of the game store, and the power supply voltage of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is turned on before the business start of the next day. Therefore, the set value of the previous day and the set value of the day can be compared depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed. Then, since the information about the set value can be obtained depending on whether or not the set value effect is executed, the player is made to pay attention at the start of the variation display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on, and the effect symbols EZ1 to 1 It is possible to improve the effect of the variable display of EZ3.

Furthermore, there are two types of set value effects, the first set value effect and the second set value effect, which have different functions and suggest different information about the set values. It is possible to improve the effect of the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 by paying attention to the person at the start of the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on.

(Example of modification of the ninth embodiment)
The first set value effect and the second set value effect effect mode, that is, the first special start mode and the second special start mode are not limited to the ninth embodiment and may be appropriately set. The effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be variablely displayed in a mode different from the first special start mode and the second special start mode. Further, the set value effect that provides information on the set value by using, for example, the display mode of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 when the reach is established or stopped, not at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3. May be executed.

Further, the set value effect may be performed by the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 other than the variable display of the first effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 after the power is turned on. For example, after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the set value effect may be executed by using the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 a predetermined number of times, for example, the first 10 times after the power is turned on. This number of times may be set to one or a plurality. Further, after the power supply voltage is applied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the set value effect may be executed by using the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 in a predetermined period after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Further, the set value effect may be executed based on the amount of change of the set value from the set value on the previous day. For example, when executing the first set value effect, as the amount of change from the previous day's set value increases, it is associated with the amount of change, such as increasing the movement width in the left-right direction, increasing the movement speed, or increasing the number of movements. The first set value effect may be executed. In addition, when executing the second set value effect, as the amount of change from the previous day's set value increases, the movement width of at least one of the left-right direction and the up-down direction is increased, the movement speed is increased, or the number of movements is increased. The second set value effect may be executed in relation to the amount of change, such as increasing the number.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the set value effect is executed using the image display device 50, but in addition to the image display device 50 or in place of the image display device 50, the speaker 52, the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53, and The set value effect may be executed by using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the board movable device 55. An effect device other than the image display device 50 may be used for either or only one of the first set value effect and the second set value effect. Further, when both the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed by using an effect device other than the image display device 50, the effect mode of the effect device other than the image display device 50 is the first set value effect. And the second set value effect may be the same or different.

Further, in the ninth embodiment, the first set value effect and the second set value effect are executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, but instead of this, they are executed using the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. May be. Alternatively, the first set value effect and the second set value effect may be executed using the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. Further, either one of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is used to execute either the first set value effect or the second set value effect, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to 1 are executed. Either one or the other of KZ3 may be used to execute either the first set value effect and the second set value effect.

<10th Embodiment>
Next, a tenth embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention. In the tenth embodiment, a small hit that is not provided in the basic embodiment is provided. The small hit is one of the determination results of the big hit determination. That is, in the jackpot determination, one of jackpot, small hit, and loss is selected. As a result, the probability of loss differs depending on the set value, and the set value is suggested by the frequency of occurrence of loss. The same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or the corresponding configurations.

First, the jackpot determination table used in the jackpot determination will be described. The jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is different from the jackpot determination table shown in the basic embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) to 93 (C) and FIGS. 94 (A) to 94 (C), the jackpot determination table of the tenth embodiment is associated with the set value.

Furthermore, the jackpot determination table associated with the set value is also associated with the type of starting port in which the prize is awarded due to the jackpot determination, that is, the type of special figure subject to the variable display performed based on the jackpot determination. ing. In the following, the jackpot determination table associated with the special figure 1 will be referred to as a "first jackpot determination table", and the jackpot determination table associated with the special figure 2 will be referred to as a "second jackpot determination table".

Further, the first jackpot determination table and the second jackpot determination table are also associated with the gaming state. That is, each first jackpot determination table includes a first jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a first jackpot determination table used in a high probability state. On the other hand, each second jackpot determination table includes a second jackpot determination table used in a normal probability state and a second jackpot determination table used in a high probability state.

Then, in each big hit determination table, special symbol random number determination values are appropriately assigned to the big hit, the small hit, and the loss as the big hit determination result. The details of the selection rate of big hit, small hit, and loss in the big hit determination table will be described later.

Further, the gaming state set after the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment is also different from that in the basic embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 95, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A is a high-probability high-base gaming state, and the high-probability specified number of times and the time-saving specified number of times at this time are 160 times. It is set to times. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B is a high-probability low-base gaming state, and the high-probability predetermined number of times at this time is 160 times. On the other hand, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol C is a low-probability low-base gaming state. That is, if the jackpot symbol C is won, the gaming state is not advantageous to the player other than the jackpot game is executed.

The gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol D and the jackpot symbol E is a high-probability high-base gaming state, and the high-probability specified number of times is set to 160 times and the time-saving specified number of times is set to 160 times. Further, the gaming state after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol F is a low-probability high-base gaming state, and the time reduction specified number of times at this time is 100 times.

Further, the effect mode set after the jackpot game in the tenth embodiment is also partially different from the case of the basic embodiment. The slightly different point from the case of the basic embodiment is that when the high-probability low-base gaming state or the low-probability low-base gaming state is set after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol B and the jackpot symbol C. , A latent mode is set that makes it difficult to determine whether a high-probability low-base gaming state or a low-probability low-base gaming state is set.

The latent mode is the longest, after the high-probability low-base game state is set, without winning the jackpot, until the special figure variable display of the high-probability specified number of times related to the jackpot symbol B is executed, or the low-probability low-base. After the game state is set, it is continued until the special symbol variable display of the high probability specified number of times related to the jackpot symbol B is executed without winning the jackpot.

Further, the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is also different from the case of the basic embodiment due to the provision of the small hit. The special figure fluctuation pattern related to the small hit can be appropriately set. For example, as shown in FIGS. 96 to 97, in the case of a small hit, the same special figure fluctuation pattern as in the case of loss can be selected. If a small hit is won, the reach determination is performed in the same manner as in the case of loss, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is distinguished by the presence or absence of reach.

Specifically, as the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits with reach related to the non-time saving state, and the special figure 1 for small hits without reach related to the non-time saving state. Fluctuation pattern judgment table, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits related to time-saving gaming state, special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table for small hits with reach related to non-time saving state, small hits without reach related to non-time saving state There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for small hits related to a time-saving gaming state.

Further, in the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for small hits with reach related to the non-time saving state, the special figure 1 variation for small hits without reach used when the number of reserved figures (U1) in special figure 1 is 0 to 2. There is a pattern determination table and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits without reach, which is used when the number of reservations (U1) in the special figure 1 is 3 to 4. Similarly, in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for the small hit with reach related to the non-time saving state, the special figure 2 for the small hit without reach used when the reserved number (U2) of the special figure 2 is 0 to 2. There is a variation pattern determination table and a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for small hits without reach, which is used when the number of reservations (U2) in the special figure 2 is 3 to 4.

If you win a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state and it is judged that there is reach, SP loss fluctuation, L loss fluctuation, and N loss fluctuation and special figure fluctuation time, and production flow are the same, SP small One of the hit variation, the L small hit variation, and the N small hit variation is selected.

Furthermore, if a small hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the non-time saving state and it is determined that there is no reach, the normal A loss fluctuation, the normal B loss fluctuation, and the normal C loss fluctuation and the special figure fluctuation time, and the production flow Is the same, normal A small hit variation, normal B small hit variation, and normal C small hit variation are selected.

Further, when a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery in a time-saving state, the shortened B loss variation, the special figure variation time, and the shortened B small hit variation having the same effect flow are selected regardless of the presence or absence of reach. This is because, as will be described later, the small hit probability in the special figure 2 lottery is very low compared to the loss.

Then, when the small hit is won, finally, the stop display of the special figure indicating the small hit is performed on the special figure variable display. When the fixed time starts after the special figure is stopped in the mode of showing a small hit, the small hit game is performed. The special figure stopped in the mode of showing the small hit is the small hit symbol, and its role corresponds to the big hit symbol and the lost symbol. Next, the small hit game will be described. In the tenth embodiment, only one type of small hit symbol is provided, but a plurality of types may be set.

The small hit game consists of an open game that involves opening and closing the large winning opening 14, an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game, and the final open game. It includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end to the end of the small hit game. Each open game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous open game, and ends with the start of the next open game or the start of the ending. It is possible not to provide OP and ED.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the tenth embodiment controls the small hit game by using the small hit game control table. In the tenth embodiment, only one type of small hit game is provided, but a plurality of types may be set in association with a plurality of types of small hit symbols.

As shown in FIG. 98, the small hit game control table stores elements constituting the small hit game (small hit game components). The small hit game components include the number of open games, the type and opening time of the large winning opening in which each open game is performed (opening pattern), the time to close until the next opening (closing time), and the opening time (opening time). ), And the ending time (ending time), etc. are included. When there are a plurality of types of small hit games, it is possible to set a small hit game component for each type of small hit game.

In the small hit game of the tenth embodiment shown in FIG. 98, the open game is performed twice. Then, in each open game, the big winning opening 14 is opened for 0.2 seconds. The closing time of the large winning opening 14 between each open game is 2.0 seconds. In addition, there is an opening in which the closed state of the large winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the start of the small hit game to the start of the first open game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the large winning opening 14 is maintained for 0.5 seconds from the end of the last open game to the end of the small hit game.

Next, a point different from the basic embodiment in the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 due to the provision of the small hit will be described. As the processing performed by the game control microcomputer 101 in the tenth embodiment, mainly, special operation processing, special figure 1 determination processing, special drawing 1 variation pattern determination processing, special drawing 2 determination processing, special drawing 2 variation pattern determination processing, And the special symbol determination process is different from the basic embodiment. First, the special operation processing will be described.

The special operation process includes a small hit game control process. The small hit game control process is associated with the special operation status "6", and is performed as step S1507 when the special operation status "6" is set. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default. The process of setting the special operation status to "6" will be described later.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a small hit game control process to perform a small hit game according to the above-mentioned small hit game control table. In the small hit game control process, the game control microcomputer 101 shows an ending corresponding to the small hit symbol related to the small hit game when all the open games are completed and the ending is started in the small hit game. The ending command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 changes the special operation status to "1" when the small hit game ends in the small hit game control process.

Next, the special figure 1 determination process will be described. In the special figure 1 determination process, the earliest stored special symbol random numbers stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a are read out and stored in the jackpot determination table according to the current set value and the game state. Based on this, it is determined whether it is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss.

As described above, since the jackpot determination table is associated with the set value, the game control microcomputer 101 selects the first jackpot determination table associated with the set current set value. Further, since the first jackpot determination table is also associated with the game state, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the first jackpot associated with the normal probability state in the first jackpot determination table associated with the set value. Select the table or the first jackpot determination table associated with the high probability state. Then, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot determination in which a special symbol random number is collated with the selected first jackpot determination table.

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the game control microcomputer 101 further reads out the jackpot symbol random number and determines the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type determination) based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table. .. Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer. Alternatively, if the result of the big hit determination is "small hit", the small hit symbol data representing the small hit is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command representing the small hit is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100 is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process according to the tenth embodiment. Steps S1651 to S1654, steps S1658 to S1661, and steps S1664 to S1667 of FIG. 100 are the same as steps S1651 to S1654, steps S165 to step S1658, and steps S1695 to S1662 of the basic embodiment. be. Hereinafter, the points different from the basic embodiment of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1654 that the jackpot determination result is not "big hit" (NO in S1654), the game proceeds to step S1655 and the jackpot determination result. Determines whether or not is a "small hit". When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the big hit determination result is not "small hit" (NO in S1655), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1658 to perform reach determination related to loss.

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1655 that the big hit determination result is "small hit" (YES in S1655), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1656 and makes a small hit as in the case of the reach determination related to the loss. Make a reach determination. The same reach determination table is used for the reach determination related to the small hit and the reach determination related to the loss.

Subsequently, in step S1657, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the reach determination result is “with reach”. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is not "with reach" (NO in S1657), it proceeds to step S1662 to select the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for small hits without reach, and then steps. Proceed to S1665. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the reach determination result is "with reach" (YES in S1657), it proceeds to step S1663 and selects the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for small hits with reach. To step S1665.

After proceeding to step S1665, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the same processing as in the basic embodiment.

Further, the special figure 2 determination process is basically performed except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since is the same process as the special figure 1 determination process, the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process is basically the same as the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process except that the table used in the special figure 2 variation pattern determination is the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 101. FIG. 101 is a special symbol determination process according to the tenth embodiment. Steps S1751 to S1761 and step S1765 of FIG. 100 are the same as steps S1751 to S1761 and step S1762 of the basic embodiment. Hereinafter, the points different from the basic embodiment of the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment will be described.

In the special symbol determination process of the tenth embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1758 that the jackpot symbol has stopped (NO in S1758), the game proceeds to step S1762, and whether or not the small hit symbol has stopped. To judge. When the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S1762 that the small hit symbol has not stopped (NO in S1762), it proceeds to step S1765, changes the special operation status to "1", and ends the special symbol confirmation process. ..

On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the small hit symbol has stopped in step S1762 (YES in S1762), the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S1763 to perform the small hit game preparation process, and sets the special operation status to "6" in step S1764. Change to and finish the special symbol confirmation process.

The game control microcomputer 101 sets the small hit game control table in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104 in the small hit game preparation process. In addition, the small hit opening flag indicating that the small hit game is being opened is turned on in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the opening time of the small hit game (the first open game is started after the small hit game is started). Time to) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the opening of a small hit is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Next, the selection rate of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in the big hit determination table will be described. As described above, in the jackpot determination table, special symbol determination values are appropriately assigned to the jackpot determination results, that is, the jackpot, the small hit, and the loss. As a result, the selection rate of the big hit, the small hit, and the loss in each big hit determination table is as shown in FIG. 102. In the following, the selection rate of big hits is referred to as "big hit probability", the selection rate of small hits is referred to as "small hit probability", and the selection rate of loss is referred to as "loss probability".

As shown in FIG. 102, the jackpot probability does not differ depending on the type of the special figure related to the jackpot determination if the game states are the same in each set value. However, in each set value, the jackpot probability differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state even if the type of the special figure is the same. Specifically, regardless of the set value, the jackpot probability is set higher in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. And, in any jackpot probability state, the jackpot probability increases as the set value increases.

Further, the small hit probability does not differ depending on the game state as long as it is the same type of special figure in each set value. However, in each set value, even if the type of the special figure is the same, the small hit probability differs depending on the type of the special figure related to the big hit determination. Specifically, regardless of the set value, the small hit probability is set higher in the case of the special figure 1 than in the case of the special figure 2. And, regardless of the set value, the small hit probability is set almost the same for each type of special figure.

Further, each set value differs depending on the gaming state. Then, the probability of loss in Special Figure 1 decreases as the set value increases, regardless of the gaming state. Further, the loss probability of the special figure 1 is higher in the normal probability state than in the high probability state at any set value. That is, the high probability state is less likely to be lost. Furthermore, the degree to which the probability of loss decreases is greater in the high probability state than in the normal probability state. On the other hand, the loss probability of the special figure 2 is substantially the same in the normal probability state and the high probability state. The loss probability of the special figure 2 is substantially the same regardless of the set value regardless of the gaming state.

Further, in any of the set values, the loss selection rate shows the relationship of special figure 2 in the normal probability state / high probability state> special figure 1 in the normal probability state> special figure 1 in the high probability state.

Here, with respect to the special figure 1, the loss probability in the high probability state is very different depending on the set value. On the other hand, with respect to Special Figure 1, the loss probability in the normal probability state is higher than that in the high probability state regardless of the set value, but the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is smaller than that in the high probability state. Further, the loss probability in the special figure 2 is higher than the loss probability according to the special figure 1 regardless of the set value. However, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the normal probability state according to the special figure 2 and the difference due to the set value of the loss probability in the high probability state according to the special figure 2 are the difference in the normal probability state according to the special figure 1. It is overwhelmingly smaller than the difference due to the set value of the loss probability.

Therefore, basically, in a high-base game state in which the entire game progresses by winning a game ball in the second starting port 12 and performing the variable display of the special figure 2, the set value is estimated based on the frequency of occurrence of loss. It's difficult. On the other hand, in a low-base game state in which the entire game progresses by winning a game ball in the first starting port 11 and performing the variable display of the special figure 1, it is a high-base to estimate the set value based on the frequency of loss. It is easier than the game state. Even in the low-base gaming state, in the high-probability state, the difference due to the set value of the loss probability is large, so that it is easy to estimate the set value according to the frequency of occurrence of the loss.

In this way, since the set value is suggested based on the occurrence frequency of the loss that is not desired by the player, the player can pay attention to the loss. As a result, it is possible to reduce the player's boredom with the game and improve the game entertainment. Further, since the accuracy of suggesting the set value differs depending on the game state, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to give the game a sharpness as a whole. In particular, in the low-base game state where it is relatively difficult to execute the variable display of the special figure, the accuracy of suggesting the set value based on the frequency of occurrence of loss is higher, so it is possible to effectively prevent the game from getting bored. Can be done. Further, in the high-base game state in which the variable display of the special figure is relatively easy to be executed, the accuracy of suggesting the set value based on the frequency of occurrence of loss is low, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Further, in each set value, the probability of loss according to the special figure 1 differs between the normal probability state and the high probability state, so that after the jackpot game B or the jackpot symbol C is performed. , It is also possible to infer the game state from the frequency of occurrence of loss when the game is being played in the same latent mode. As a result, the hobby of the game is improved.

(Example of modification of the tenth embodiment)
The specific values of the jackpot probability, the small hit probability, and the loss probability are not limited to the tenth embodiment and may be appropriately set. Further, the magnitude relation of the loss probability in each set value is not limited to the tenth embodiment and may be appropriately set. For example, in each set value, the loss probability may be set to be higher in the order of the high probability state of the special figure 1> the normal probability state of the special figure 1> the normal probability state / the high probability state of the special figure 2. ..

Further, the magnitude relation of the degree of difference depending on the set value of the loss probability is not limited to the tenth embodiment and may be appropriately set. For example, the degree of difference depending on the set value of the probability of loss is set to be large in the order of the normal probability state of Special Figure 1> the high probability state of Special Figure 1> the normal probability state / high probability state of Special Figure 2. May be.

<11th Embodiment>
Next, the eleventh embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random. The same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiment or the corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment is provided with a set value setting method changeover switch 74 for randomly setting the set value. Setting value setting method The changeover switch 74 is composed of a slide switch having five contacts, and is provided in the vicinity of the setting value switch 71 as shown in FIG. 103.

Setting value setting method "Random setting OFF" that does not set the setting value randomly by the changeover switch 74, "Random setting A", "Random setting B", "Random setting C", and "Random setting" that set the setting value randomly. It can be switched to any of "Setting D". Specifically, it is possible to slide the knob 74k that constitutes the operation unit of the setting value setting method changeover switch 74 in five stages, and by sliding the knob 74k, "random setting OFF" and "random setting" are possible. It is possible to switch to any of "A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D".

The details of "random setting A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D" will be described later, but "random setting A", "random setting B", and "random setting C" The selection rate of the set value differs between "Random setting D" and "Random setting D". In the following, "random setting OFF", "random setting A", "random setting B", "random setting C", and "random setting D" are methods for setting the set values, and in the following, "setting". Collectively referred to as "value setting method".

Further, the set value setting method changeover switch 74a is connected to the set value setting method changeover switch 74a capable of detecting the slide operation of the knob 74k, that is, the changeover operation of the set value setting method. As shown in FIG. 104, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a is connected to the game control board 100.

When the knob 74k is slid, the set value setting method changeover switch sensor 74a detects the position of the knob 74k and outputs a detection signal indicating the position to the game control board 100. The position of the knob 74k is associated with each set value setting method. Therefore, the detection signal indicating the position of the knob 74k substantially indicates the selected set value setting method.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a set value random number is provided as in the special symbol random number, the jackpot symbol random number, and the special symbol variation pattern random number. The set value random number is a random number (determination information) used in the setting value setting method determination described later. The game RAM 104 is provided with a set value random number counter indicating a set value random number.

The game control microcomputer 101 updates the set value random number counter by adding 1 in the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process in step S12. When the counter value of the set value random number counter reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The range of the set value random number can be set as appropriate, but in the eleventh embodiment, it is set to 0 to 65535. Further, the initial value of the set value random number counter may be a value other than "0", or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 is set in the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process in step S103 as well as the update process of the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information. Value Adds 1 to the counter value of the random number counter and updates it. It is performed in both the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and the other period (the period from the end of the game control side timer interrupt process to the start of the next game control side timer interrupt process). .. The process of adding 1 to the counter value of the set value random number counter and updating it may be performed only in either step S12 or step S103.

Next, the set value setting process of the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 105. FIG. 105 is a set value setting process according to the eleventh embodiment. Step S51, step S53 to step S56, and step S63 of FIG. 105 are the same as step S51, step S52 to step S55, and step S56 of the basic embodiment.

In the set value setting process of the eleventh embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 displays the set value on the set value display 87 in step S51, and then in step S52, the set value setting method changeover switch 74 is used to set the set value. It is determined whether or not "random setting OFF" is selected. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that "random setting OFF" is selected, it proceeds to step S53, and if it determines that "random setting OFF" is not selected, it proceeds to step S57. Since the processing in the case of proceeding to step S53 is the same as in steps S52 to S56 in the basic embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 is associated with the set value setting method selected by the set value setting method changeover switch 74, specifically, any of the selected random settings A to D. Select the set value judgment table. Here, the set value determination table will be described.

The set value determination table is a data table used in the set value determination for determining the set value. The setting value judgment table includes a setting value judgment table (first setting value judgment table) used when random setting A is selected, and a setting value judgment table (first setting value judgment table) used when random setting B is selected. 2 setting value judgment table), setting value judgment table used when random setting C is selected (third setting value judgment table), and setting value judgment table used when random setting D is selected (3rd setting value judgment table). There is a fourth set value determination table). In other words, the set value determination table is associated with the set value setting method. It should be noted that these set value determination tables are stored in the game ROM 103.

Each set value determination table is configured so that each set value is selected with a predetermined selection rate. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 106, in each set value determination table, the determination value of the set value random number (set value random number determination value) is appropriately allocated to each set value at the selection rate shown in FIG. 106. It has been. The setting value determination table is configured so that the probability that each setting value is selected differs depending on the setting value setting method (that is, random setting A to random setting D).

In the first set value determination table, as the set value becomes higher, the selection rate for the set value becomes lower. The selection rate for the set value "6" is set to "0". That is, when the random setting A is selected, the setting value "6" is not selected. On the other hand, in the fourth set value determination table, as the set value becomes higher, the selection rate for the set value becomes higher. The selection rate for the set value "1" is set to "0". That is, when the random setting D is selected, the setting value "1" is not selected.

Further, in the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table, the selection rate for the set value "1" and the set value "2" is the same, and the selection for the set value "3" and the set value "4" is selected. The rates are the same, and the selection rates for the set value "5" and the set value "6" are the same. Then, in the case of the second set value determination table, as the set value increases, the selection rate for the set value decreases. On the other hand, in the case of the third set value determination table, the higher the set value, the higher the selection rate for the set value.

In the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table, unlike the cases of the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table, any set value can be selected. .. Further, the second set value determination table and the third set value determination table are configured so that the difference in selectivity is smaller depending on the set value as compared with the first set value determination table and the fourth set value determination table. There is.

Return the explanation to the set value setting process. When the game control microcomputer 101 selects the set value determination table in step S57, the game control microcomputer 101 then loads the counter value of the set value random number counter backed up as backup data into the game RAM 104 in step S58, and sets value random numbers. Is acquired, and in step S59, the set value random number indicated by the counter value is collated with the set value determination table selected in step S57 to perform the set value determination.

Subsequently, in step S60, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the set value data indicating the set value determined in the set value determination in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104, and sets a new set value. In step S61, the set value is displayed on the set value display 87, and it is determined in step S62 whether or not there is an operation for confirming the set value. The game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the same process until it is determined that there is an operation for confirming the set value. Then, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that there is an operation for confirming the set value, the process proceeds to step S63, and the set value designation command indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 to produce an effect. It is transmitted to the control board 120.

In this way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random, so that the clerk of the game store operates the set value switch 71 for a large number of pachinko gaming machines PY1 to set. While reducing the labor of changing the value, it is possible to improve the game entertainment by changing the set value. Further, since the set value can be arbitrarily set by selecting the random setting OFF with the set value setting method changeover switch 74, the functionality of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is improved. Further, since a plurality of setting value setting methods for randomly setting the set value are provided, it is possible to further reduce the bias of the set value.

(Example of modification of the eleventh embodiment)
In the eleventh embodiment, the set value can be set at random, but the mechanism and processing for that purpose are not limited to the eleventh embodiment and may be appropriately set. For example, the set value setting method changeover switch 74 is composed of a slide switch, but a switch may be used from another mechanism such as a rotary switch or a DIP switch.

Further, the type of the set value setting method for randomly setting the set value and the selection rate of the set value in each set value determination table may be appropriately set. Further, the set value may be set randomly by a method different from the set value determination.

7. Other Modification Examples Further, other modification examples of the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments will be described below.

The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, a two-contact slide switch may be used instead of the set value cylinder 70 as a machine that enables the operation of changing the set value. In this case, if the knob is arranged at one position, the operation of changing the set value may be performed. Further, as a machine for performing an operation for setting a set value, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used instead of the set value switch 71. In this case, the position of the knob may be directly associated with the set value. Further, the positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 may be appropriately changed without particular limitation.

Further, the configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, another display such as a dot matrix LED display may be used as the display for displaying the set value. Further, the position of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, the set value display 87 may be arranged not on the game control board 100.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value, but the operating means for clearing the game RAM 104. The game RAM 104 may be cleared without performing an operation for changing the set value by providing a cylinder or the like.

Further, the operation for confirming the set value is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be appropriately set. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may be able to recognize the rotation operation to the handle 72k, and the set value may be determined by the rotation operation of the handle 72k. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 can recognize the operation of the so-called "ball rental button" or "return button", and the set value is determined by the operation of these buttons. Is also good.

Further, although six setting values of the setting value "1" to the setting value "6" are provided as the setting values, the number of the setting values is not limited to six and may be appropriately set. Further, the identification information for the set value is not limited to the numbers such as "1" to "6", and may be characters or other symbols such as "A" to "F".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when it is determined to be a specific jackpot symbol type, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big winning device 14D, a second big winning device that can be opened and closed and allows a game ball to enter at the time of opening is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and the big hit game is in progress. When the second big prize device is opened in a predetermined round game and the game ball that has entered the second big prize device passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big prize device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that makes it easy to enter the ball, and the second big prize device wins the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game ball won in the second big prize device can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball into the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Then, although the opening time of the second prize-winning device is the same, the jackpot symbol and the high-probability state that make it easy to set the high-probability state can be obtained by combining the opening mode of the second prize-winning device and the operating mode of the distribution device. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 120 performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the control of the game and the control of the effect are performed on different boards, the game may be configured to be performed on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Although the set value effect according to the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment can be executed in different situations, the set value effect according to the first embodiment to the eleventh embodiment is appropriately performed in one pachinko gaming machine PY1. It may be possible to execute it.

Further, to the extent that there is no contradiction, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to other ball gaming machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball gaming machine, a spinning machine (so-called "slot machine"), and the like. It is possible.

8. Other Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to J are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of the inventions A to J, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the above-mentioned invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A6, invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B5, invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C8, and invention D is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C8. , The following inventions D1 to D4, invention E is a general term for the following inventions E1 to E6, invention F is a general term for the following inventions F1 to F3, and invention G is the following invention G1. ~ G3, invention H is a general term for the following inventions H1 to H4, invention I is a general term for the following inventions I1 to I5, and invention J is a general term for the following inventions J1 to J4. be.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1
A start winning area (starting openings 11 and 12) provided in the game area (game area 6) where the game ball can flow down and where the game ball can enter, and
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than usual (big hit judgment). The determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability (big hit probability) that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means executes a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value set by the set value based on the number of game balls (out balls) discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized by the fact that there are times.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1.
The effect control means determines that the determination means is in the advantageous gaming state when the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area is at least a predetermined threshold value (out ball determination value) or more. , The specific effect may be executed.

8-1--3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3 is
A gaming area (game area 6) through which the game ball can flow down is formed, and a winning area (general winning opening 10, starting opening 11, 12, large winning opening 14) into which the game ball can enter is provided in the game area. A gaming machine in which a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out when a game ball enters the winning area.
The winning area has a starting winning area (starting openings 11 and 12).
When the game ball enters the start winning area, it is determined whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit game state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than usual (big hit judgment). The determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is set by the set value based on a difference number which is a difference between the number of prize balls paid out and the number of game balls discharged to the outside of the game area. It is characterized in that a specific effect (set value effect) related to a value may be executed.

8-1-4. Invention A4
The gaming machine according to the invention A4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A3.
The effect control means is characterized in that the specific effect may be executed when the difference number reaches a predetermined threshold value (difference number determination value).

8-1-5. Invention A5
The gaming machine according to the invention A5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions A1 to A4.
The specific effect is an effect that suggests the set value set by the set value.

8-1-6. Invention A6
The gaming machine according to the invention A6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions A1 to A5.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (set value effect) based on the set value.
It is characterized in that the execution frequency of the specific effect differs depending on the set value.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The effect control means is
The display unit (display unit 50a) can display the effect symbol (composite symbol G22) in a variable manner based on the determination result by the determination means, and then stop and display the determination result in a manner of notifying the display unit.
It is characterized in that the specific effect is executed by the effect symbol when the stop display is displayed.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2.
The effect control means is characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific effect when it is determined that the determination unit does not enter the advantageous gaming state.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to the invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2 or invention B3.
The effect symbol has a first part (lottery result suggestion unit G22a) regarding the determination result of the determination means and a second part (set value suggestion unit G22b) regarding the set value.
The determination result of the determination means is notified by the content (number) displayed in the first part of the effect symbol that has been stopped and displayed, and the content (〇, Δ,) displayed in the second part of the effect symbol. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific effect in (x).

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention B1 to Invention B5.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
In the display unit (special figure display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special figure) for notifying the determination result is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. Game control microcomputer 101) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value based on the number of times the variable display of the identification information is executed.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
The set value is composed of natural numbers (1 to 6).
The effect control means can execute the specific effect on condition that a predetermined number of consecutive digits (last two digits, last three digits) of the number of times of execution of the variable display of the identification information is the same number. It is characterized by that.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C2.
The effect control means is provided with the condition that the predetermined number of digits is the same number and the determination result, which is the notification target of the variable display of the identification information, is in the advantageous gaming state. Is characterized by being feasible.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to the invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C2 or the invention C3.
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (odd number setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value is odd, and a second specific effect (even number setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value is even. And there is
The effect control means is
The first specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined number of digits is the same odd number.
It is characterized in that the second specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the predetermined number of digits is the same even number.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to the invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C4.
In addition to the first specific effect and the second specific effect, the specific effect includes a third specific effect (odd high setting) that suggests that the setting value has an odd number with a high probability among the set values. Further includes a suggestion effect) and a fourth specific effect (even-numbered high setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value has an even number with a high probability.
The effect control means is
The first specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the last two digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number.
The second specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the last two digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same even number.
Based on the fact that the last three digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same odd number, the third specific effect can be executed.
The fourth specific effect can be executed based on the fact that the last three digits of the number of executions of the variable display of the identification information are the same even numbers.

8-3-6. Invention C6
The gaming machine according to the invention C6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C5.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-3-7. Invention C7
The gaming machine according to the invention C7 is
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied (winning of the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 <4, winning of the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 <4), the player is more than in the normal gaming state. A determination means (S1602, a game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), which is advantageous to the player.
In the display unit (special figure display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special figure) for notifying the determination result is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. Game control microcomputer 101) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is characterized in that it is possible to execute a specific effect (set value effect) related to the set value based on the number of times the advantageous gaming state is reached.

8-3-8. Invention C8
The gaming machine according to the invention C8 is
A gaming machine according to invention C7.
The advantageous game state is a state in which a special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege is executed.
The determination means determines whether or not to execute the special game when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A game for performing game state control means (S1504, S1506) capable of setting a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state with the end of the special game. Further equipped with a control microcomputer 101)
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the game state control means sets the specific game state to the normal game state, and sets the game state to the normal game state.
The effect control means is characterized in that after the special game is executed, the specific effect can be executed based on the number of times the special game is executed without satisfying the end condition.

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is
In the display unit (display unit 50a), it is possible to display a plurality of effect symbols (effect symbol G10) in a variable manner based on the determination result by the determination means, and then stop and display the determination result in a manner of notifying the display unit. can be,
It is characterized in that a specific effect (set value effect) suggesting the set value can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols displayed as stopped.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
When the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is not set, the effect control means can execute the specific effect by the plurality of effect symbols that are stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying that the advantageous gaming state is not set. It is characterized by being.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D2.
The effect control means is
It is possible to bring the plurality of effect symbols into the reach state when the variation display of the plurality of effect symbols is performed.
When the variation display of the plurality of effect symbols is performed in which the reach state is not executed, the specific effect can be executed by the plurality of effect symbols stopped and displayed in a manner of notifying that the advantageous gaming state is not achieved. It is characterized by being.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to the invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions D1 to D3.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The set values include a first set value (set value 1 to set value 4) and a second set value (set value 5 to set value 6) having a higher probability than the first set value. There is
There are a first effect content (win or success) and a second effect content (defeat or failure) as the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be executed by the effect control means.
When the first set value is set, after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, a specific event (big hit game state, which is more advantageous to the player than at that time). The continuation of the round game, the continuation of the high probability state, the continuation of the high probability state, etc.) may occur, while the specific event occurs after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means. Never do
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, and the effect control means may cause the effect. It is characterized in that the specific event may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing the special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous gaming state. Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 101)
The specific event is characterized by the execution of the special game.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to the invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing the special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous gaming state. Further equipped with a game control microcomputer 101)
In the special game, a unit game (round game) is executed a plurality of times, and the game is executed.
The special game includes a case where the unit game is executed a first number of times and a case where the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times.
The specific event is characterized in that the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to the invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing the special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous gaming state. Game control microcomputer 101) and
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1506) that sets a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and Further prepared,
The specific event is characterized in that it is a setting of the specific gaming state.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to the invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means (S1505) for executing the special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege (prize ball) is performed as the advantageous gaming state. Game control microcomputer 101) and
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1506) that sets a specific game state (high probability state, time saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and Further prepared,
The specific gaming state may be continued for the first period or may be continued for the second period after the first period is continued.
The specific event is characterized in that the specific gaming state can be continued for the second period after the continuation for the first period.

8-5-6. Invention E6
The gaming machine according to the invention E6 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions E1 to E5.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
In the display unit (special figure display 81), display control means (S1502, S1503, S1504) for executing variable display of identification information (special figure) for notifying the determination result is performed based on the determination result by the determination means. Game control microcomputer 101) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is a specification that suggests the set value based on a specific number of times (number of addictions), which is the number of times that the variable display of the identification information is continuously executed without determining that the determination means is in the advantageous gaming state. The feature is that the effect (set value effect) can be executed.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1.
The specific effect includes a first specific effect and a second specific effect.
The effect control means can execute the first specific effect when the specific number of times reaches the first number, and the specific number of times reaches the second number, which is larger than the first number. With this as an opportunity, the second specific effect can be executed.
The second specific effect is characterized in that the set value is more easily recognized than the first specific effect.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1 or the invention F2.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-7-1. Invention G1
The gaming machine according to the invention G1 is
Predetermined game benefits (prize balls) due to the establishment of predetermined conditions (winning of the first starting port 11 with the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 <4, winning of the second starting port 12 with the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 <4). ) Is determined by determining whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) capable of acquiring), and a game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609.
When it is determined by the determination means that the special game is to be executed, the special game control means for executing the special game and the special game control means.
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the special game is executed differs depending on the set value.
In the special game, a unit game (round game) is executed a plurality of times, and the game is executed.
The special game includes a plurality of types of the special game (fifth big hit game to ninth big hit game) depending on the number of unit games to be executed.
The effect control means is
At least, when any one of the plurality of set values including the maximum set value (set value 6) which is the set value having the highest probability among the set values is set, the number of times of the unit game is maximum. In the maximum special game which is the special game of the above, the maximum special game suggestion effect (blessing effect) suggesting that the maximum special game is being executed may be executed.
When the maximum set value is set, the maximum special game suggestion effect may suggest that the maximum set value is set.

8-7-2. Invention G2
The gaming machine according to the invention G2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention G1.
In the maximum special game suggestion effect, the first maximum special game suggestion effect (maximum setting value suggestion blessing effect) suggesting that the maximum setting value is set, and the maximum setting value being set. There is a second maximum special game suggestion production (normal blessing production) that does not suggest,
The effect control means is
When the maximum setting value is set, the first maximum special game suggestion effect or the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed.
When a set value other than the maximum value set value is set, the second maximum special game suggestion effect can be executed.

8-7-3. Invention G3
The gaming machine according to the invention G3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention G1 or the invention G2.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-8-1. Invention H1
The gaming machine according to the invention H1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) for setting one of a plurality of predetermined set values (set value 1 to set value 6), and
It is equipped with an effect control means (microcomputer 121 for effect control) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The effect control means is
In the display unit, it is possible to display the effect symbol (effect symbol G10) in a variable manner based on the determination result by the determination means, and then stop and display the effect symbol in a manner of notifying the determination result.
It is characterized in that it is possible to start the variable display of the effect symbol based on the set value.

8-8-2. Invention H2
The gaming machine according to the invention H2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention H1.
The effect control means can start the variation display of the effect symbol based on the set value with respect to the variation display of the effect symbol that is first performed after the power is turned on to the gaming machine. It is characterized by being.

8-8-3. Invention H3
The gaming machine according to the invention H3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention H1 or the invention H2.
The effect control means has a display mode (normal start mode) when the effect symbol starts variable display when the set value of the day and the set value of the previous day are the same, and the set value of the day. It is characterized in that the display mode (first special start mode, second special start mode) when the effect symbol starts variable display when the set value on the previous day is different may be different.

8-8-4. Invention H4
The gaming machine according to the invention H4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Invention H1 to Invention H3.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-9-1. Invention I1
The gaming machine according to the invention I1 is
Predetermined game benefits (prize balls) due to the establishment of predetermined conditions (winning of the first starting port 11 with the number of holdings in Special Figure 1 <4, winning of the second starting port 12 with the number of holdings of Special Figure 2 <4). ), A determination means for determining whether or not to execute the first special game (big hit game) or the second special game (small hit game) (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609).
When it is determined by the determination means that the first special game is to be executed, the first special game control means (the game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1505) that executes the first special game, and
When it is determined by the determination means that the second special game is to be executed, the second special game control means (the game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1507) that executes the second special game, and
A game state setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1506) capable of newly setting a game state (high probability state, etc.) with the end of the first special game, and
It is provided with a setting value setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) to set one setting value among a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6).
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
It is characterized in that the probability that the determination means determines that the first special game is executed differs depending on the set value.

8-9-2. Invention I2
The gaming machine according to the invention I2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention I1.
It is characterized in that the probability of determining that neither the first special game nor the second special game is executed differs depending on the set value.

8-9-3. Invention I3
The gaming machine according to the invention I3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention I2.
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same.

8-9-4. Invention I4
The gaming machine according to the invention I4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions I1 to I3.
The predetermined conditions include the first condition (winning of the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in FIG. 1 <4) and the second condition (winning of the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings of special figure 2 <4). ) And
The determination means includes the first determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602) that determines whether or not to execute the first special game or the second special game when the first condition is satisfied. And a second determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1609) that determines whether or not to execute the first special game or the second special game when the second condition is satisfied. ,
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same.
Regardless of the set value, the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game is substantially the same.
It is characterized in that the probability that the first determination means determines to execute the second special game and the probability that the second determination means determines to execute the second special game are different.

8-9-5. Invention I5
The gaming machine according to the invention I5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of Inventions I1 to I4.
Further provided with an operating means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means can set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

8-10-1. Invention J1
The gaming machine according to the invention J1 is
It is more advantageous to the player than usual by satisfying the predetermined conditions (winning the first starting port 11 when the number of holdings in the special figure 1 <4, winning the prize in the second starting port 12 when the number of holdings in the special figure 2 <4). A determination means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S1602 and S1609) for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.), and
It is provided with a setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined setting values (setting value 1 to setting value 6).
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The setting means may set the set value depending on which set value is set.

8-10-2. Invention J2
The gaming machine according to the invention J2 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1.
Further equipped with a switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of performing an operation for switching a plurality of options.
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (for example, random settings A and D) and a second specific option (for example, random settings B and C).
When the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected, the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of set values in the determination. It is characterized in that the judgment probabilities are different.

8-10-3. Invention J3
The gaming machine according to the invention J3 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1.
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of switching a plurality of options, and
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing the operation of switching the set value is further provided.
The plurality of options include at least specific options (random setting A to random setting D) and non-specific options (random setting OFF).
The setting means is
When the specific option is selected, the set value can be set by the determination.
When the non-specific option is selected, it is possible to set the set value based on the operation to the second switching operation means.

8-10-4. Invention J4
The gaming machine according to the invention J4 is
A gaming machine according to invention J1.
A first switching operation means (setting value setting method switching switch 74) capable of switching a plurality of options, and
A second switching operation means (setting value switch 71) capable of performing the operation of switching the set value is further provided.
The plurality of options include at least a first specific option (random setting A, random setting D), a second specific option (random setting B, random setting C), and a non-specific option (random setting OFF). ,
The setting means is
When the first specific option or the second specific option is selected, the set value can be set by the determination.
When the non-specific option is selected, the set value can be set based on the operation to the second switching operation means.
When the first specific option is selected and when the second specific option is selected, the setting means sets a part or all of the plurality of set values in the determination. It is characterized in that the judgment probabilities are different.

PY1 ... Pachinko game machine 1 ... Game board 11 ... 1st starting port 11a ... 1st starting port sensor 12 ... 2nd starting port 12a ... 2nd starting port sensor 14 ... Large winning opening 14a ... Large winning opening sensor 50 ... Image display Device 50a ... Display 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 55 ... Panel movable device 55k ... Panel movable body 70 ... Set value cylinder 70a ... Set value cylinder sensor 71 ... Set value switch 71 ... Set value switch sensor 74 ... Set value setting method Changeover switch 74a ... Set value setting method Changeover switch sensor 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 140 ... Image control board

Claims (6)

A determination means for determining whether or not to enter an advantageous gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A setting means for setting one of a plurality of predetermined setting values, and a setting means for setting the setting value.
Equipped with an effect control means capable of executing a predetermined effect,
The determination means makes the determination based on the set value, and makes the determination.
The probability that the determination means determines that the advantageous gaming state is set differs depending on the set value.
The set value includes a first set value and a second set value having a higher probability than the first set value.
There are a first effect content and a second effect content as the effect content of the predetermined effect that can be executed by the effect control means.
When the first set value is set, a specific event that is more advantageous to the player may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means. On the other hand, the specific event does not occur after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed by the effect control means.
When the second set value is set, the specific event may occur after the predetermined effect of the first effect content is executed by the effect control means, and the effect control means may cause the effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific event may occur even after the predetermined effect of the second effect content is executed. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state is further provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific event is the execution of the special game. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the advantageous gaming state is further provided with a special game execution means for executing a special game capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege.
In the special game, a unit game is executed a plurality of times, and the unit game is executed.
The special game includes a case where the unit game is executed a first number of times and a case where the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times.
The specific event is a gaming machine characterized in that the unit game is executed a second number of times after the first number of times. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means for executing the special game capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege as the advantageous gaming state, and the special game execution means.
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is further provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific event is a setting of the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
When it is determined by the determination means that the advantageous gaming state is set, the special game execution means for executing the special game capable of acquiring a predetermined game privilege as the advantageous gaming state, and the special game execution means.
With the end of the special game, a specific game state setting means for setting a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is further provided.
The specific gaming state may be continued for the first period or may be continued for the second period after the first period is continued.
The specific event is a gaming machine characterized in that the specific gaming state can be continued for the second period after the continuation for the first period. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
Further provided with an operation means capable of performing an operation for setting the set value,
The setting means is a gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to set the set value based on an operation on the operating means.

Images